2023 HR-V
Owner’s Manual
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 0 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 1 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
System Updates Terms and Conditions
*
General
Your vehicle has an application that allows your 9-in. Color
Touchscreen to automatically search for Honda software updates
that are specific to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen and its connected
devices (initially every one (1) week via Wi-Fi or every four (4) weeks
via Telematics Control Unit (TCU)
*
, queries may occur more or less
frequently due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP
push from the server or a change in query policy on the Honda
servers). This application periodically transmits to our servers a
limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification
Number, Hardware and Software Part Number, Serial Number,
Software Version, preferred language, Internet Protocol (IP)
address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update
download and installation, software status), etc.). When the
application finds an update from the server, the application initially
asks permission to download and install the update. Where
available, in your settings menu you may elect to automatically
download and install these updates or you may elect to manually
update the system.
When your 9-in. Color Touchscreen searches our servers for
updates or alerts, we will automatically provide you with the
opportunity to update your devices or transmit the update or alert
directly to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen. We will also maintain on
our servers a log of the updates or alerts that are installed.
Your Personal Data
Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda
constitute personal information in your region, please note that this
information will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and
regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable data
protection law.
The terms of our privacy policy are incorporated into these terms by
reference and your use of system updates will be subject to the
privacy policy. Our privacy policy sets out information about how we
and any named third parties will process any personal data we collect
from you or that you provide to us, via the application.
For further details, see Honda's connected product privacy policy at:
U.S.: www.honda.com
Canada: www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata
Honda collects, uses and stores your personal data for the reasons
set out below:
●
to deliver the system updates and related services to you;
●
to allow us to improve and optimize the system updates
products and services;
●
to respond to user questions and complaints; and for internal
record keeping.
●
where necessary for Honda's legitimate interests, as listed
below, and where our interests are not overridden by your data
protection rights.
Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights
includes, but is not limited to, use in connection with compliance,
regulatory, auditing, legal claims (including disclosure of such
information in connection with legal process or litigation) and other
ethics and compliance reporting requirements.
Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and
use it (normally on an aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as
market research and analysis, to improve the system updates, to
analyze trends, and to assess the success of software update
releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally
identify you or any other user of the system updates.
Honda may share this data with Honda's worldwide support
organization or affiliated Honda companies or other third parties
engaged by Honda for the purposes of rendering support services
in connection with system support.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 2 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in this Owner’s Manual, and
which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End
User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing
your use of the installed software, as well as the applications,
services, functions, and content provided through the software.
Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the
terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop
CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
To learn more about how we collect and use Personal
Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible
at www.honda.com.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 3 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
●
Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
●
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
●
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
●
Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
●
Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 4 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 5 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
This page intentionally left blank.
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The Navigation Manual is available online at honda.ca. If you are
the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a
complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within
the first six months of vehicle purchase. Please request a copy
from your Honda dealer.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 39 Airbags P. 50
2 Instrument Panel P. 85
Indicators P. 86 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 104
2 Controls P. 133
Clock P. 134 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 136
Moonroof
*
P. 162
Seats P. 180 Interior Convenience Items P. 189
2 Features P. 211
Audio System P. 212 Audio System Basic Operation P. 219, 244
Customized Features P. 337, 345 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 369, 389
2 Driving P. 409
Before Driving P. 410 Towing a Trailer P. 415
Braking P. 528 Parking Your Vehicle P. 537
2 Maintenance P. 551
Before Performing Maintenance P. 552 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 555
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 577
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 595
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 603
Tools P. 604 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 605
Overheating P. 620 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 622 Fuses P. 628
If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 636 Refueling P. 637
2 Information P. 639
Specifications P. 640 Identification Numbers P. 642
Emissions Testing P. 645 Warranty Coverages P. 647
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 6 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Contents
Child Safety P. 70 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 83 Safety Labels P. 84
Tailgate P. 153 Security System P. 156 Windows P. 159
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 163 Mirrors P. 178
Climate Control System P. 203
Audio Error Messages P. 314 General Information on the Audio System P. 316
Refuel Recommend P. 408
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 416 When Driving P. 418 Honda Sensing® P. 449
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545 Refueling P. 547 Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions P. 550
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 563 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 575
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581 Battery P. 592 Remote Transmitter Care P. 594
Cleaning P. 596 Accessories and Modifications P. 601
Engine Does Not Start P. 612 If the Battery Is Dead P. 617 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 619
Emergency Towing P. 634 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 635
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 643 Reporting Safety Defects P. 644
Authorized Manuals P. 650 Customer Service Information P. 651 Open Source License P. 652
Quick Reference Guide
P. 8
Safe Driving
P. 33
Instrument Panel
P. 85
Controls
P. 133
Features
P. 211
Driving
P. 409
Maintenance
P. 551
Handling the Unexpected
P. 603
Information
P. 639
Index
P. 653
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 7 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
8
Quick Reference Guide
Quic
k Reference
Visual Index
❚
Climate Control System (P203)
❚
Rear Defogger (P176)
❚
Heated Door Mirror Button
*
(P176)
❚
Audio System (P212)
❚
Navigation System
*
() See Navigation System Manual
❚
System Indicators (P86)
❚
Gauges (P104)
❚
Driver Information Interface (P107)
❚
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P163)
❚
Hazard Warning Button
❚
Heated Windshield Button (P176)
Canadian models
❚
(Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) System OFF) Button (P435)
❚
Front Seat Heater Buttons
*
(P202)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 8 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
9
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Headlights/ Turn Signals (P166, 168)
❚
Left Selector Wheel (P108)
❚
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow Buttons
(P471)
❚
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Button
(P491)
❚
Interval Button (P451)
❚
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P177)
❚
Heated Steering Wheel Button
*
(P201)
Canadian models
❚
Horn (Press an area around .)
❚
Wipers/Washers (P174)
❚
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Buttons (P369, 389)
❚
Audio Remote Controls (P215)
❚
(home) Button (P107)
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 9 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Visual Index
10
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Power Window Switches (P159)
❚
Master Door Lock Switch (P151)
❚
Door Mirror Controls (P179)
❚
Interior Fuse Box (P630)
❚
Hood Release Handle (P564)
❚
Driver’s Front Airbag (P53)
❚
Passenger’s Front Airbag (P53)
❚
Drive Mode Switch (P429)
❚
(Hill Decent Control) Button (P433)
❚
Rearview Mirror (P178)
❚
Automatic Brake Hold Button (P532)
❚
Electric Parking Brake Switch (P528)
❚
Glove Box (P192)
❚
Shift Lever (P427)
❚
USB Port (P213)
❚
Knee Airbags (P58)
❚
Knee Airbags (P58)
❚
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(P67)
❚
Wireless Charger
*
(P197)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 10 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
11
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P77)
❚
Sun Visors
❚
Vanity Mirrors
❚
Map Lights (P190)
❚
Moonroof Switch
*
(P162)
❚
Seat Belts (P39)
❚
Front Seat (P180)
❚
Front Side Airbags (P61)
❚
USB Ports (P213)
❚
Cargo Area Lights (P191)
❚
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P47)
❚
Accessory Power Socket (P196)
❚
Grab Handle
❚
Coat Hook (P194)
❚
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P79)
❚
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P75)
❚
Rear Seats (P183)
❚
Rear Side Airbags (P61)
❚
Map Lights (P190)
❚
Side Curtain Airbags (P64)
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 11 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Visual Index
12
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Maintenance Under the Hood (P563)
❚
Windshield Wipers (P174, 577)
❚
Tires (P581, 605)
❚
Rear Wiper (P175, 579)
❚
How to Refuel (P548)
❚
Multi-View Rear Camera (P545)
❚
Back-Up Lights and Taillights (P576)
❚
Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Turn Signal
Lights, and Rear Side Marker Lights
(P576)
❚
High-Mount Brake Light (P576)
❚
Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P153)
❚
Tailgate Outer Handle (P154)
❚
Lock Button
*
(P140)
❚
Side Turn Signal Lights
*
(P168, 575)
❚
Power Door Mirrors (P179)
❚
Headlights (P166, 575)
❚
Front Turn Signal Lights (P168, 575)
❚
Front Side Marker Lights (P166, 575)
❚
Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P170, 575)
❚
Rear License Plate Light (P576)
❚
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P139)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 12 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
13
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System (P 429)
Ambient Meter
●
The color of the ambient meter
changes to green to indicate that
the vehicle is being driven in a fuel
efficient manner.
DRIVE MODE Switch
(P 429)
Helps maximize fuel
economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 98)
Comes on when the ECON mode is
selected.
Ambient Meter
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 13 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
14
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 33)
Airbags (P50)
●
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P70)
●
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
●
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
●
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P83)
●
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain
carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces
where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P38)
●
Before driving, check that the front seats, head
restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been
properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P39)
●
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
●
Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 14 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
15
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P85)
Indicators (P86)/Gauges (P104)/Driver Information Interface (P107)
Tachometer (P104) Speedometer (P104)
Traffic Sign Recognition System (P105)
Driver Information Interface (P107)
Fuel Gauge (P104)
Outside Temperature (P105) Odometer (P105)
Shift Position Indicator (P91) /
Transmission System Indicator (P91)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 15 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
16
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P133)
Clock (P134)
a Press the MENU button.
b Select Clock Settings.
c Select Automatic Time, then select OFF.
d Select Set Time.
e Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour
clock.
f Select or .
g Select Set to set the time.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
MENU Button
3
4
To adjust date
To adjust time
a Press the button.
b Select General Settings.
c Select System.
d Select Date & Time.
e Select Set Date & Time.
f Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
g Select Set Date or Set Time.
h Select or .
i Select Save to set the date or time.
The clock is automatically updated through
the audio system.
ENGINE START/STOP
Button
(P163)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
3
4
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 16 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
17
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals (P168)
Lights (P166)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing the high beams
Wipers and Washers
(P174)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
*
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps
: Higher speed, more sweeps
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Steering Wheel (P177)
●
To adjust, push the adjustment lever
down, adjust to the desired position, then
lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P150)
●
Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 17 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
18
Quick Reference Guide
Tailgate (P153)
●
With all the doors unlocked, press the
tailgate outer handle and lift open the
tailgate.
●
Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock
and open the tailgate when you carry the
keyless remote.
Models without keyless access system
Models with keyless access system
Power Door Mirrors
(P179)
●
With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
●
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P159)
●
With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
●
If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
●
If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window
Lock Button
Window Switch
Indicator
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 18 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
19
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System (P203)
●
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
●
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
●
Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control Dial
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Temperature Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
(ON/OFF) Button
AUTO Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Dashboard
ven
ts
Dashbo
ard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
windshield
defroster vents
MODE Control Dial
Models without SYNC button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 19 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
20
Quick Reference Guide
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Fan Control Dial
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Dashboard
vents
Da
shboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
windshield
defroster vents
Models with SYNC button
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
SYNC (Synchronization)
Button
MODE Control Button
(Recirculation) Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 20 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
21
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P211)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 215)
●
SOURCE Button
Press to cycle through the audio modes as
follows:
FM AM USB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/
Android Auto Bluetooth® Audio
●
VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
●
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:
Press / to change the preset
radio station. Press and hold /
to change the strong station.
iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio,
or Smartphone Connection:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or return to
the beginning of the current song.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
SOURCE Button
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(-
(Volume) Switch
USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio:
Press and hold / to change a
folder/group.
●
VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
●
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:
Press / to change the preset
radio station. Press and hold /
to change the strong station.
iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio,
or Smartphone Connection:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or return to
the beginning of the current song.
USB flash drive:
Press and hold / to change a
folder.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Left Selector Wheel
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
(Home) Button
●
Left Selector Wheel
When selecting the audio mode
Press the (Home) button, then roll up
or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the
left selector wheel.
Roll up or down: To cycle through the
audio modes, roll up or down and then
press the left selector wheel:
FM
AM
SXM
USB
Bluetooth
Apps
(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
Back
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 21 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
22
Quick Reference Guide
Audio system (P 212)
(Seek/Track) Button
RADIO Button
PHONE Button
(Seek/Track) Button
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power) Knob
Audio/Information Screen
(Back) Button
MENU Button
Selector Knob
MEDIA Button
CONNECT Button
(P 219)
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 22 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
23
Quick Reference Guide
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power) Knob
(Home) Button
(Back) Button
Audio/Information Screen
(Seek/Track) Button
(Seek/Track) Button
(P 244)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 23 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
24
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P409)
Depress the brake pedal and press
the release button to move out of
(P.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(P427)
●
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Drive (S)
●
Better acceleration.
●
Used to increase engine braking.
●
Used when going up or down hills.
Low
●
Used to further increase engine braking.
●
Used when going up or down hills.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Press the release button to move
the shift lever.
Shift Lever
Release
Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 24 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
25
Quick Reference Guide
CMBS
TM
On and Off
(P457)
●
When a possible frontal collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBS
TM
can reduce the
vehicle speed and the severity of the
collision.
●
The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you
start the engine.
●
To turn the CMBS
TM
on or off, use the
safety support of the driver information
interface.
VSA® On and Off (P435)
●
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
system helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
●
VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
●
To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
(P438)
●
Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
●
The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
●
A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
U.S. models only
Refueling (P547)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 14.0 US gal (53 L)
a Unlock the driver’s
door.
(P 149)
b Press on the edge of
the fuel fill door to
make it pop up
slightly.
c After refueling, wait
for about five
seconds before
removing the filler
nozzle.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 25 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
26
Quick Reference Guide
Honda Sensing® (P449)
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system
which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors
located in the front and rear bumpers, and
the front grille, and a front wide view
camera mounted to the interior side of the
windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system
which employs the use of a front wide view
camera mounted to the interior side of the
windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Models without Low Speed Braking Control
Front Wide View
Camera
Sonar Sensors
*
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) (P453)
The system can assist you when it
determines there is a possibility of your
vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including
motorcycles) ahead from behind, an
oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or
someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle).
The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when
the potential for a collision is determined, as
well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding
collisions, and reducing collision severity.
Low Speed Braking
Control
*
(P465)
Using sonar sensors located on the front and
rear bumpers, and the front grille, this
system can detect if there is danger of a
potential collision with a wall or other
obstacle during normal driving or when the
accelerator pedal is depressed with too
much force. The system then assists in
avoiding collisions and reducing damage
from impact through assistive braking and/
or assistive driving power suppression.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow
(P471)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected
vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and
stop your vehicle, without you having to
keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
(P491)
Provides steering input to help keep the
vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 26 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
27
Quick Reference Guide
Traffic Jam Assist
*
(P502)
The traffic jam assist system uses a camera
mounted to the upper portion of the
windshield to detect and monitor left and
right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.
Based on inputs from the camera, the
system can apply steering torque to keep
your vehicle in the center of the detected
lane.
Road Departure
Mitigation System
(P 511)
Alerts and helps assist you when the system
detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing
over detected lane markings, or
approaching the outer edge of the
pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a
detected oncoming vehicle.
Traffic Sign Recognition
System
(P519)
Reminds you of road sign information, such
as the current speed limit your vehicle has
just passed through, showing it on the
gauge.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 27 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
28
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P551)
Under the Hood (P563)
●
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
●
Check brake fluid.
●
Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly,
you can release the lever.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights (P575)
●
Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P577)
●
Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield or become noisy.
Tires (P581)
●
Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
●
Check tire pressures regularly.
●
Install snow tires for winter driving.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 28 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Quick Reference Guide
29
Handling the Unexpected (P603)
Flat Tire (P605)
●
Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.
Indicators Come On
(P622)
●
Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
Engine Won’t Start (P612)
●
If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P628)
●
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P620)
●
Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing (P634)
●
Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 29 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
30
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P535)
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the lock
position. If so, open the rear door with
the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, slide the lever up
to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 30 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
31
Quick Reference Guide
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
• The exterior lights are left on.
• The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Why does a beeper sound
when I walk away from the
vehicle after I close the
door?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock
operating range before the door completely closes.
2 Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) (P142)
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
Models with keyless access system
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 31 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
32
Quick Reference Guide
Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?
• Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
• Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other
position.
I’m seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P438)
U.S. models only
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 32 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
33
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 34
Important Handling Information......... 36
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 37
Safety Checklist ................................. 38
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 39
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 44
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 49
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 50
Types of Airbags ................................ 53
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 53
Knee Airbags ..................................... 58
Side Airbags....................................... 61
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 64
Airbag System Indicators.................... 66
Airbag Care ....................................... 69
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 70
Safety of Infants and Small Children... 72
Safety of Larger Children ................... 81
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 83
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 84
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 33 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
34
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■
Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■
Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■
Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 34 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
35
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■
Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
■
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be
injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the
vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be
injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of
the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the
climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the
climate control system can shut off at any time.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 35 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
36
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving
Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping
or rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
1Important Handling Information
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,
read:
2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
P. 425
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 416
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 36 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
37
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front and
rear outer seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
Knee Airbags
Door Locks
Safety Cage
7
9
9
8
10
6
11
10
12
13
9
11
12
8
Side Airbags
12
13
Outer Lap Pretensioners
7
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 37 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
38
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Seats P. 180
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 186
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age,
height, and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 70
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on
the driver information interface, a door and/or the
tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and
the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 38 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
39
Continued
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to
restrain your body.
The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 77
1About Your Seat Belts
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 39 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
40
Safe Driving
■
Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then, refasten the belt.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 40 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
41
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■
Front seats
The seat belt system includes an indicator on
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts.
If you set the power mode to ON and a seat
belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound, and
the indicator will blink. After a few seconds,
the beeper will stop and the indicator will
come on and remain illuminated until the seat
belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving
until the seat belt is fastened.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on, and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 70
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the
driver in checking the status of the passengers.
For the front seating positions:
• Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.
• An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt
is not fastened, and an occupant has not been
detected.
• An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt is
unfastened, and an occupant has been detected.
: Fastened
: Unfastened
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 41 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
42
Safe Driving
■
Rear seats
Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use.
A driver information interface notifies you if
any of the rear seat belts are unfastened after
they were previously fastened.
In order to encourage the driver to evaluate
rear seat belt usage, the display appears
when:
• Any of the rear passengers’ seat belts are
unfastened when the power mode is set to
ON.
• A rear door is opened and then closed.
• Any of the rear passengers fastens or
unfastens their seat belt.
The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and
beeper sounds if any rear passenger’s seat belt
is unfastened while driving.
To see the display:
2 Switching the Display P. 107
: Fastened
: Unfastened
1Seat Belt Reminder
The system will not detect a passenger in the rear
seats who has not fastened the seat belt.
The driver should check the status of the rear
passengers’ seat belts at the start of each trip and
each time a passenger is seated in the rear seats,
using the driver information interface as an aid.
An alert will sound if a passenger in the rear seats
unfastens the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
or if motion resumes while the graphic is red.
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the
driver in checking the status of the passengers.
For the rear seating positions:
• Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.
• An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt
has not been fastened recently.
• An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt
was unfastened recently.
The system does not monitor harnesses that are part
of a child seat, the anchors of the LATCH system, or
the anchor buckle of the rear center seat belt.
While the system can inform you that a seat belt
buckle is fastened, it cannot determine whether the
rear center seat belt anchor buckle is in use or if a
child seat is properly installed or used.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 70
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 42 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
43
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts
during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not
severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the front knee airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on both sides of the vehicle also activates.
Front seats
Outer rear seats
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 43 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
44
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Seats P. 180
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully
retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt
once, then push it back in.
Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten.
If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully
retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the
seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 39
2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 49
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 44 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
45
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing
door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 45 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
46
Safe Driving
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
■
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
Push
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 46 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
47
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
■
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
3
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unfastened increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.
Anchor
Buckle
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Buckle
Latch Plate
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 47 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
48
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 48 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
49
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 49 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
50
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
9
13
11
9
10
13
6
6
9
9
6
12
7
6
9
6
8
9
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 50 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
51
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Continued
Safe Driving
The front, driver’s knee, front passenger’s
knee, side, and side curtain airbags are
deployed according to the direction and
severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags
are deployed in a rollover. The airbag
system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Two knee airbags. The driver’s knee
airbag is stored under the steering
column; the front passenger’s knee
airbag is stored under the glove box.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
c Four side airbags, one for the driver, one
for the front passenger and two for the
rear outboard seat occupants. The front
airbags are stored in the outer edges of
the seat-backs and the rear airbags are
stored next to the outer rear seating
positions. All are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
d Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
e An electronic control unit that, when the
power mode is in ON, continually
monitors information about the various
impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors,
rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat
belt tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.
f Automatic seat belt tensioners for the
front seats and outer rear seats. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
g Driver’s seat position sensor. This sensor
detects the driver’s seat slide position to
help determine the optimal deployment
of the driver’s airbag.
h Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are used for occupant
classification to activate or deactivate the
front passenger’s airbag.
i Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
j An indicator near the front map lights
that alerts you that the front passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l A rollover sensor that can detect if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.
m Pressure sensors inside each front door
that control side airbag deployment.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 51 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
52
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front, driver’s knee and front
passenger’s knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG
could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 52 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
53
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s outer seat-backs and
next to the outer rear seating positions.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 53 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
54
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 54 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
55
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Continued
Safe Driving
■
When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■
When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■
When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 55 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
56
Safe Driving
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.
The front passenger’s advanced airbag system
has weight sensors. The sensors are used for
occupant classification to activate or
deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.
For adult size occupants, the system will
automatically activate the front passenger’s
airbag. If a small adult sits in the front
passenger seat and the system does not
recognize him/her as an adult, see
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 67
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the
SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a
crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s
seating position or passenger’s occupant
classification) with a force corresponding to the
severity of the impact.
2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Indicator P. 66
For the advanced front airbags to work properly,
confirm that:
• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is
not excessively reclined.
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.
• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard
are not obstructed by any object.
• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat Weight
Sensors
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 56 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
57
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s
seat.
However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s seat,
the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. Do
not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does not
automatically deactivate.
1Advanced Airbags
• There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned
objects can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 67
• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An
improperly placed mat can interfere with the
advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 597
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 57 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
58
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Safe Driving
Knee Airbags
The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep
the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the
benefit provided by the vehicle’s other safety features.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbag is designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The knee airbag for the driver and the one for
the front passenger are housed under the
steering column and the glove box
respectively.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Knee Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as
they can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.
The driver and front passenger should not store any
items under the seat or behind their feet. The items
can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the
event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and
may result in inadequate protection.
Housing
Location
Housing
Location
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 58 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
59
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
The driver’s and front passenger’s knee airbag
deploy at the same time as the driver’s and
front passenger’s airbag respectively.
■
Operation
When
inflated
Knee
Airbag
When
inflated
Knee Airbag
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 59 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
60
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Safe Driving
■
When knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■
When knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 60 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
61
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or
an outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs and next to the outer rear seating
positions.
Each are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you, your front seat passenger, and rear
outboard seat occupants always sit upright. Leaning
into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag
from deploying properly and increases your risk of
serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Side airbag deployment is controlled by a pressure
sensor inside each front door. Damage or changes to
the inside or outside of the doors may negatively
affect side airbag deployment. Contact an authorized
dealer before changing or repairing a front door.
Housing
Location
Housing
Location
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 61 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
62
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 62 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
63
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 63 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
64
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners
for the front seats and outer rear seats.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 64 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
65
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
■
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 65 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
66
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface.
■
When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or
does not come on at all, have the system
checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you
don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when they are needed.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 66 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
67
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■
When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
This occurs if the seat is empty or when the
weight sensors determine that a small child or
infant is on the passenger seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 70
If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.
The passenger’s knee airbag will not deploy, either.
■
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm
that:
• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is
not excessively reclined.
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.
• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
• There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned
objects can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
• The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An
improperly placed mat can interfere with the
advanced airbag sensors.
• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
U.S. Canada
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 67 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
68
Safe Driving
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,
depending on physique and posture, the system may
not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate
the passenger’s airbag.
If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set
forth in the above bullet points on the previous page
are met.
If the above conditions are met and the indicator is
still on, then with the transmission in park, turn to
VEHICLE off and back on.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible if:
• All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
• The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front
seat when the indicator is on.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 68 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
69
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■
When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, seat belt tensioners for
the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the
crash.
■
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-
999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-
9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbags,
tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 69 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
70
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a
child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 70 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
71
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 84
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 71 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
72
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant
reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.
■
Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 50
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a
child so long as the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing
position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
installed in a rear seating position.
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 72 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
73
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat,
the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat
until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
■
Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 73 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
74
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■
Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 74 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
75
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
The location of each lower anchor is shown in
the illustration.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
3
WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
be strong enough to hold two child seat
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
Lower
Anchors
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 75 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
76
Safe Driving
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
4. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
5. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Flexible Type
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower
anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-
compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however,
is not equipped with anchors of any kind.
The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a
standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance
between the two inner anchors is 16.1 inches (410 mm).
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted
with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the
rear center seat. However, a system fitted with
flexible-type attachments can be installed in the
center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the
inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is
properly attached to both the lower anchors and
tether anchors.
3
WARNING
Using the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to
secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
center seating position may result in failure
of the child seat, causing injury or death.
Only use the outer rear seats’ inner anchors
to install a child seat in the center seating
position if the manufacturer’s instructions
expressly permit.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
Straight Top Tether Type
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
Other Top Tether Type
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 76 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
77
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and
check that the retractor has switched
modes by pulling on the webbing. It should
not pull out again until it is reset by
removing the latch plate from the buckle.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the
way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 77 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
78
Safe Driving
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 78 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
79
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchor point is provided behind the
rear outer seating positions and in the ceiling
for the rear center. If you have a child seat that
comes with a tether but can be installed with
a seat belt, the tether may be used for
additional security.
■
Using an outer anchor
1. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats
whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.
Tether
Anchor
Points
Outer position
Tether
Anchor
Point
Center position
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
Straight Top Tether Type
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 79 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
80
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
■
Using the center anchor
1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
Other Top Tether Type
Anchor
Anchor Cover
Straight Top Tether Type
Anchor
Anchor Cover
Other Top Tether Type
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 80 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
81
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■
Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 81 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
82
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that
the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 82 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
83
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 83 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
84
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Radiator Cap
Sun Visor
U.S. models only
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Canadian models
Air Conditioner System
U.S. models
Canadian models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 84 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
85
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 86
Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges............................................ 104
Driver Information Interface ............. 107
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 85 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
86
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may
display on the Driver Information Interface at the same time. Please take the
appropriate action outlined in the message, such as contacting a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 86 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
87
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
Automatic Brake
Hold System Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator
U.S.
Canada
*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine
has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the
owner's manual.
P. 88
*1
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
(Amber)
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA
®) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA
®) OFF Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
*
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
System Message Indicator
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow Indicator (Amber)
Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator (Amber)
Safety Support Indicator
(Green/Gray)
P. 90
P. 90
P. 90
P. 91
P. 91
*1
*1
P. 95
*1
Shift Position Indicator
P. 91
Transmission System
Indicator
P. 91
P. 92
P. 92
P. 93
P. 93
P. 96
P. 94
*1
*1
P. 94
*1
P. 93
P. 99
*1
P. 96
P. 96
P. 96
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Security System Alarm
Indicator
P. 97
P. 98
P. 100
P. 103
*1
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow Indicator (White/
Green)
P. 99
*1
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) Indicator
(White/Green)
P. 100
*1
Safety Support Indicator
(Amber)
P. 101
*1
Cruise Mode Indicator
(White/Green)
P. 99
*1
Low Temperature
Indicator
P. 92
P. 97
*1
*1
ECON Mode Indicator
P. 98
NORMAL Mode Indicator
P. 98
SNOW Mode Indicator
P. 98
Hill Descent Control System
Indicator (White/Green)
P. 98
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 87 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
88
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
●
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
●
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
you drive with the parking brake applied.
●
Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply
the electric parking brake while the power mode is
in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.
●
Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the
power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric
parking brake is applied, then goes off.
●
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
●
Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking
brake is released. Stop in a safe place and check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on
while driving P. 624
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 88 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
89
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.
●
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks P. 624
●
Comes on along with the Parking Brake and
Brake System Indicator (amber) - Immediately
stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The
brake pedal becomes harder to operate.
Depress the pedal further than you normally do.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 626
●
Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time -
There is a problem with the electric parking brake
system. The parking brake may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 626
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 89 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
90
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with a system
related to braking other than the
conventional brake system.
●
Comes on while driving - Avoid high speeds and
sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a dealer
immediately.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
electric parking brake system and/or the
automatic brake hold system.
●
Stays on constantly - Avoid using the parking
brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
●
Comes on if the brake system is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has been
disconnected, then re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
●
Comes on when the automatic brake hold
system is on.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 532
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
●
Comes on when the automatic brake hold is
activated.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 532
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 90 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
91
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
• After you have set the power mode to ON,
the vehicle performs system checks.
However, if the readiness codes have not
been set by that time, this indicator will blink
five times and then go off.
• Readiness codes are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 645
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control systems.
●
Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s
cylinders is detected.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On
or Blinks P. 623
Charging System
Indicator
• Comes on when there is a problem with the
charging system.
• Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer
immediately.
2 Checking the Battery P. 592
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 623
Shift Position
Indicator
• Indicates the current shift position.
2 Shifting P. 427
Transmission
System Indicator
• Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 91 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
92
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
• Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few
seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you set the power mode to ON, then
the indicator comes on.
• If the front passenger is not wearing a seat
belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds
later.
• Comes on for a while when the rear seat
belt is unfastened while the power mode in
ON.
• Blinks while driving if you and/or any
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
• The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when
you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.
• Stays on after you and/or the passengers has
fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may
have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 41
Low Fuel Indicator
(Amber)
• Comes on when the fuel reserve is running
low (approximately 2.1 U.S. gal./8.0 Liter
left).
• Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as
possible.
●
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.
• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Low Temperature
Indicator
• Comes on when the engine coolant
temperature is low.
• If the indicator stays on after the engine has
reached normal operating temperature, there may
be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have
your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 92 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
93
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
• Comes on if there is a problem with the
ABS.
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no anti-lock
function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 535
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
• Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
- Supplemental Restraint System
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS
system.
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
• Do not drive displays on the driver
information interface - Immediately stop in a
safe place and contact a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On P. 625
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 93 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
94
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System Indicator
●
Blinks when VSA® is active. —
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
VSA® system, brake assist system, hill start
assist, or agile handling assist.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
P. 434
2 Hill start assist system P. 423
2 Brake Assist System P. 536
2 Agile Handling Assist P. 436
●
Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has been
disconnected, then re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®)
OFF Indicator
●
Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 435
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 94 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
95
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
●
May come on briefly if the power mode is
set to ON and the vehicle is not moved
within 45 seconds, to indicate the
calibration process is not yet complete.
●
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.
●
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the
recommended pressures - The system needs to
be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 439
●
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays
on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or
when a compact spare tire is temporarily
installed.
●
Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a
compact spare tire, get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as
you can.
●
Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has been
disconnected, then reconnected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 95 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
96
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
• Blinks when you operate the turn signal
lever.
• Blinks along with all turn signals when you
press the hazard warning button.
• Does not blink or blinks rapidly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lights On
Indicator
• Comes on when the parking, tail, and other
external lights are on.
2 Lights P. 166
High Beam
Indicator
• Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
—
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
• Comes on when all the operating conditions
of the auto high-beam are met.
2 Auto High-Beam P. 171
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 96 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
97
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●
Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.
• Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the
power mode to VEHICLE OFF
*1
, then select the ON
mode again.
• Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
• Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●
Blinks when the security system alarm has
been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 156
U.S.
Canada
Indicator
Indicator
U.S.
Canada
Indicator
Indicator
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 97 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
98
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
ECON Mode
Indicator
• Comes on when you set the drive mode to
ECON.
2 Drive Mode Switch P. 429
NORMAL Mode
Indicator
• Comes on when you set the drive mode to
NORMAL.
2 Drive Mode Switch P. 429
SNOW Mode
Indicator
• Comes on when you set the drive mode to
SNOW.
2 Drive Mode Switch P. 429
Hill Descent
Control System
Indicator (White/
Green)
• Lights up in white when the hill descent
control system is on and ready to use.
• Lights up in green when the hill descent
control system is in operation.
2 Hill Descent Control System P. 432
System Message
Indicator
• Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system message on
the driver information interface appears at
the same time.
• While the indicator is on, press the (home)
button, and select Warnings to see the message
again.
2 Accessing contents in the display P. 107
• Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter
when a system message appears on the driver
information interface. Respond to the message
accordingly.
• The driver information interface will not return to
the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,
or the (home) button is pressed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 98 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
99
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with ACC
with Low Speed Follow.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when the
Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
●
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been
automatically canceled.
●
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum
Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed Follow
is deactivated temporarily after the battery
has been disconnected, then re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow Indicator
(White/Green)
●
Lights up in white when you press the
button.
●
Lights up in green when you press the
RES/+/SET/− switch up or down.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow P. 471
Cruise Mode
Indicator (White/
Green)
●
Lights up in white when you change to
cruise mode.
●
Lights up in green when you have set a
speed for cruise control.
2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to
Cruise Control P. 488
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 99 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
100
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
LKAS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when the
Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
●
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum
Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(White/Green)
●
Lights up in white when you press the LKAS
button.
●
Lights up in green when the LKAS is in
operation.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 100 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
101
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with Road
Departure Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low
Speed Braking Control
*
, or blind spot
information system
*
.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
parking sensor.
●
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered
with mud, ice, snow, etc. if the indicator stays on
even after you clean the area, have the system
checked by a dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when the
Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
●
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum
Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Comes on if the Road Departure Mitigation
system, Low Speed Braking Control
*
and
CMBS
TM
are deactivated temporarily after
the battery has been disconnected and then
re-connected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with Parking Sensor System
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 101 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
102
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on when Road Departure Mitigation
system and/or CMBS
TM
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is
too high.
Use the climate control system to cool down the
camera.
The system activates when the temperature inside
the camera cools down.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place
and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message are still displayed even after
you have cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
●
It may come on when the ambient conditions are
dark, such as when driving in a tunnel, or at night,
dawn, or dusk.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 102 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
103
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of sonar sensor.
●
Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of sonar sensor.
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 465
●
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of the blind spot
information system sensor.
●
Comes on when the temperature of the
blind spot information system sensor is high.
●
Comes on while driving - Something may be
interfering with the blind spot information system
sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot
information system sensor and remove any
obstacles.
●
The system will return to normal when the
temperature cools down.
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 445
Safety Support
Indicator (Green/
Gray)
●
Lights up in green when Road Departure
Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low Speed
Braking Control
*
, Parking Sensor System
*
,
and blind spot information system
*
are on.
●
Lights up in green and gray when Road
Departure Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low
Speed Braking Control
*
, Parking Sensor
System
*
, or blind spot information system
*
,
or any two, three or four of these systems
are off.
●
Lights up in gray when Road Departure
Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low Speed
Braking Control
*
, Parking Sensor System
*
,
and blind spot information system
*
are off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 511
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 453
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 445
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 465
2 Parking Sensor System
*
P. 538
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Models with blind spot information system
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 103 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
104
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators.
They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
■
Speedometer
■
Tachometer
■
Fuel Gauge
1Speedometer
You can change the Speed/Distance Units.
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
1Tachometer
The tachometer can be turned on and off using the
driver information interface or audio/information
screen.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 104 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
105
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■
Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Shows certain detected traffic signs while driving.
The indicator blinks when the maximum speed of the traffic sign detected by the
Traffic Sign Recognition System is exceeded.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519
■
Odometer
■
Outside Temperature
■
Traffic Sign Recognition System
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
You can adjust the temperature reading.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 105 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
106
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Instrument Panel
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and Traffic Jam
Assist
*
.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 471
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491
2 Traffic Jam Assist
*
P. 502
Shows the clock.
You can adjust the time manually and change the clock display to show the 12 hour
clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Clock P. 134
■
Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, the LKAS, and
Traffic Jam Assist
*
■
Clock
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 106 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
107
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface
The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable
distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings
and other helpful information.
When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer
and have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the
Engine oil pressure low or Engine temperature too hot message is displayed.
2 If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 622
2 Overheating P. 620
■
Accessing contents in the display
Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content
you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.
■
Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
You can add or delete the meter contents.
2 Customize Display P. 121
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 107 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
108
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Customize
display
P. 121
Left Selector
Wheel
(home) Button
Roll the left
selector wheel.
No content
P. 122
Speed & time
P. 111
Warnings
P. 122
Range & fuel
P. 109
Settings
*
P. 123
Driver
attention
P. 114
Seat belts
P. 118
Safety
Support
P. 118
Maintenance
P. 118
Phone
*
P. 112
Audio
*
P. 112
Navigation
*
P. 113
AWD torque
distribution
*
P. 117
Brightness
P. 120
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 108 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
109
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
■
Range/Fuel/Trip Meter
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Trip Meter B
Instant Fuel Economy
Trip Meter A
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 109 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
110
Instrument Panel
■
Trip meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter
To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
■
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.
■
Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
■
Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated
distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
1Range
The driving range displayed is only an estimate and
may differ to the actual distance the vehicle can
travel.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 110 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
111
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
■
Speed/Time/Trip Meter
Trip Meter B
Average Speed
Trip Meter A
Elapsed Time
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 111 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
112
Instrument Panel
■
Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 110
■
Elapsed time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■
Average speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 244
Shows the current phone information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 389
■
Audio
*
■
Phone
*
1Elapsed time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
1Average speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 112 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
113
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■
Compass
Shows the compass screen.
■
Turn-by-Turn Directions
When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system
*
, Android Auto or
Apple CarPlay, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
2 Android Auto
TM
P. 308
2 Apple CarPlay P. 301
■
Navigation
*
1Navigation
*
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn
display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 345
Turn-by-turn directions may not be available for all
apps.
When the compass or turn-by-turn directions are
displayed, you can control some navigation system
functions on the driver information interface by
scrolling the left selector wheel.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Models with navigation system
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 113 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
114
Instrument Panel
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the
degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.
When you select Driver attention on the
driver information interface, bars on it light up
in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s
attention.
2 Accessing contents in the display P. 107
■
Driver Attention Monitor
1Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if
the driver is tired or inattentive.
Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are
feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as
long as needed.
Driver Information
Interface
Left Selector
Wheel
(home) Button
Level
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 114 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
115
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
If two bars light up, the Driver attention
level low message will appear.
If one bar lights up, the Driver attention
level low. Time for a break. message will
appear, a beep will sound, and the steering
wheel will vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the left
selector wheel is pressed or when the system
has determined that the driver is driving
normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is
very tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the
traveling time is 30 minutes or less.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 115 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
116
Instrument Panel
■
The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:
• The engine is turned off.
• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
■
For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
■
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491
• The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
• It is windy.
• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as
changing lanes or accelerating.
■
Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and audible
alert
*1
/Tactile And Audible Alert
*2
, Tactile alert
*1
/Tactile Alert
*2
, or OFF.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain
grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is
functioning.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 116 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
117
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
The indicators on the display show the
amount of torque being transferred to the
right front, left front, right rear, and left rear
wheels.
2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
System
TM
*
P. 437
■
AWD Torque Distribution Monitor
*
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 117 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
118
Instrument Panel
Appears, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 41
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 555
Indicates the status of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low Speed
Braking Control
*
, Parking Sensor System
*
, and blind spot information system
*
, such
as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the status of any of the above mentioned systems:
• Green: The system is on.
• Gray: The system is off.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
■
Seat Belts
■
Maintenance
■
Safety Support
1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left
selector wheel to switch displays. From the next
display you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 511
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 445
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 453
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 465
2 Parking Sensor System
*
P. 538
You can also confirm the status of each function by
the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 101
2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 103
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 118 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
119
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Area Info
for CMBS
TM
Area Info
for Road
Departure
Mitigation
System
Area Info
for Blind
Spot
Information
System
Area Info
for Parking
Sensor
System
Road
Departure
Mitigation
System Icon
and Status
Info
Area Info for Low
Speed Braking
Control
Blind Spot
Information
System Icon
and Status
Info
Parking
Sensor
System
Icon and
Status Info
CMBS
TM
Icon and
Status
Info
Low
Speed
Braking
Control
Icon and
Status
Info
Models with Blind Spot
Information System
Models with Low Speed
Braking Control
Models with Parking
Sensor System
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 119 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
120
Instrument Panel
Display the adjustment for instrument panel brightness.
When the power mode is in ON, you can use the left selector wheel to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Roll the left selector wheel up.
Dim: Roll the left selector wheel down.
Press the left selector wheel to exit.
■
Brightness
1Brightness
The brightness of the gauge is automatically adjusted
depending on the ambient brightness.
• The brightness dims when the ambient light is
dark.
• The brightness brightens when the ambient light is
bright.
You can change the setting even when the ambient
lighting is bright, but the brightness of the gauge
won’t change.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 120 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
121
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■
Arrange content
You can choose which icons to display on the home screen.
1. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select
Customize display, then press the left
selector wheel.
2. Roll the left selector wheel.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll
between icons, then press the left selector
wheel to check or uncheck them.
■
Customize Display
1Customize Display
Icons that are gray cannot be removed from the
home screen.
When you customize settings, shift to
(P.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 121 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
122
Instrument Panel
2 Tachometer P. 104
■
Speed/Distance Units
Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and audio/
information screen and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and
mph or km and km/h.
Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select No content on the driver
information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and
mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for
a few seconds.
You can check if there are any active warning messages.
■
No Content
■
Warnings
1No Content
The tachometer can be turned on and off using the
driver information interface or audio/information
screen.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
Even if you have turned off the tachometer on the
driver information interface or audio/information
screen, if No content is selected on the driver
information interface, it will change to a tachometer-
only display.
2 Switching the Display P. 107
1Warnings
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left
selector wheel to see other warnings.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 122 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
123
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.
■
How to customize
Press the (home) button, then select the Settings screen by rolling the left
selector wheel while the power mode is in ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and
the shift position is in
(P. Then, press the left selector wheel.
■
Settings
*
1Settings
*
To customize other features, roll the left selector
wheel.
2 List of customizable options P. 124
2 Example of customization settings P. 130
When you customize settings, shift to
(P.
Driver
Information
Interface
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 123 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
124
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS
calibration
*
— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate
Driver assist
system setup
Forward collision
warning distance
Changes the distance at which CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC forward vehicle
detect beep
Causes the system to beep when a vehicle is detected or
when the vehicle is out of ACC with Low Speed Follow
range.
ON/OFF
*1
Road departure
mitigation setting
Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation
system.
Narrow/Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning only
Lane keeping assist
suspend beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF
*1
Blind spot
information
*
Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible and visual
alert
*1
/Visual alert
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 124 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
125
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Driver assist
system setup
Traffic sign
recognition system
display setting
Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Traffic sign
recognition system
exceeding speed
warning
Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed
warning on and off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Speed limit warning
threshold setting
Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition
system over speed warning is activated.
Speed limit
*1
/
Speed limit+3mph/
Speed limit+5mph/
Speed limit+10mph
(When mph is selected)
Speed limit
*1
/
Speed limit+5km/h/
Speed limit+10km/h/
Speed limit+15km/h
(When km/h is selected)
Driver attention
monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
Tactile and audible
alert
*1
/ Tactile alert/OFF
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 125 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
126
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Meter setup
Language selection Changes the displayed language.
English
*1
/Français/
Español
Adjust outside temp.
display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” reset timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed
time A.
When fully refueled/
IGN OFF/Manually reset
*1
“Trip B” reset timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed
time B.
When fully refueled/
IGN OFF/Manually reset
*1
Adjust alarm volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings,
turn signal sound, and so on.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Fuel efficiency backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Rear seat reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Speed/distance units Selects the trip meter units.
km/h∙km/mph∙miles
*1
(U.S.)
km/h∙km
*1
/mph∙miles
(Canada)
Tachometer
Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the
instrument panel.
ON
*1
/OFF
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 126 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
127
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Keyless access
setup
*
Door unlock mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s
door handle.
Driver door only
*1
/All
doors
Keyless access light
flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/
lock the doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless access beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the
doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Remote start system
ON/OFF
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Lighting setup
Auto high-beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Interior light dimming
time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight auto off
timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on
after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto light sensitivity
*
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto headlight ON
with wiper ON
Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the
headlights automatically come on while the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position.
ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 127 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
128
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door setup
Auto door lock
Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate
automatically lock.
With vehicle speed
*1
/
Shift from P/OFF
Auto door unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate
automatically unlock.
All doors when driver’s
door opens
*1
/All doors
when shifted to Park/
All doors when ignition
switched OFF/OFF
Walk away auto lock
*
Changes the settings for the auto lock function when
you walk away from the vehicle.
ON/OFF
*1
Keyless lock answer
back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless remote power
window control
Turns remote window control using the keyless remote
on and off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Lockout prevention
*
Changes the settings for the lockout protection
function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Lock presetting Changes the settings for the Lock Presetting function. ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 128 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
129
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Maintenance
reset
—
Resets the Maintenance Minder display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
(Selects Reset Items)
Default all —
Cancels customized changes you have made or restores
them to their default setting.
Cancel/Set
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 129 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
130
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
■
Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” reset timing setting to When fully refueled
are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” reset timing is Manually reset.
1. Press the (home) button and roll the left
selector wheel to select Settings, then
press the left selector wheel.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 130 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
131
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Continued
Instrument Panel
2. Roll the left selector wheel until Meter
setup appears on the display.
3. Press the left selector wheel.
u Language selection appears first in the
display.
4. Roll the left selector wheel until “Trip A”
reset timing appears on the display, then
press the left selector wheel.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When fully refueled, IGN
OFF, Manually reset, or Back.
5. Roll the left selector wheel and select
When fully refueled, then press the left
selector wheel.
u The Selected appears, then the display
returns to the customization menu
screen.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 131 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
132
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel
6. Press the left selector wheel after Back
appears on the display.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 132 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
133
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 134
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key .................................................. 136
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ...138
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 139
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 149
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 151
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 152
Tailgate.............................................. 153
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 156
Security System Alarm...................... 156
Windows ........................................... 159
Moonroof
*
........................................ 162
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 163
Lights............................................... 166
Auto High-Beam .............................. 171
Wipers and Washers ........................ 174
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button ........................................... 176
Heated Windshield Button ............... 176
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 177
Canadian models
Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 178
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 179
Seats
Front Seats ...................................... 180
Rear Seats........................................ 183
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position .... 185
Head Restraints................................ 186
Armrest ........................................... 188
Interior Convenience Items.............. 189
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 203
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 209
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 133 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
134
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode in ON.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Clock Settings.
3. Select Automatic Time, then select OFF.
4. Select Set Time.
5. Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour
clock.
6. Select or .
7. Select Set to set the time.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Adjusting the Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system.
You can also select and enter with the selector knob
instead of the touch panel.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
MENU Button
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
3
4
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 134 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
135
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Date & Time.
5. Select Set Date & Time.
6. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
To adjust date:
7. Select Set Date.
8. Select or .
9. Select Save to set the date.
To adjust time:
7. Select Set Time.
8. Select or .
9. Select Save to set the time.
1Adjusting the Clock
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
displayed on the header area of the audio/
information screen, Clock displayed on the home
screen, or All Apps.
1. Touch the clock on the screen.
The clock screen of the face-type appears.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Date & Time.
4. Select Set Date & Time.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.
6. Select Set Date or Set Time.
7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting or .
8. Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 How to Customize the General Settings
P. 345
You can customize the date display to MM/DD/
YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.
2 How to Customize the General Settings
P. 345
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
3
4
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
3
4
3
4
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 135 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
136
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock all the doors, tailgate, and
fuel fill door.
1Key
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 156
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the
keys:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the remote
engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start
*
P. 420
Models with button
Models without button
Models with button
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 136 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
137
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey
Controls
The built-in key can be used to unlock the
doors when the keyless remote battery
becomes weak and the power door unlock
operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, push the release
button and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
keyless remote until it clicks.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■
Built-in Key
Release Button
Built-in Key
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 137 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
138
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Controls
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote to start the engine,
lock and unlock
*
all the doors and the fuel fill door, and open the tailgate.
In the following cases, starting the engine, locking/unlocking
*
the doors/fuel fill
door, or opening the tailgate may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.
1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the keyless remote and the
vehicle consumes the keyless remote’s battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 138 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
139
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the keyless remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door, and
open the tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors, fuel fill door,
and tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches
(80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate
outer handle.
■
Using the Keyless Access System
*
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior light comes on when you unlock
the doors and tailgate.
No doors opened: The light fades out after 30
seconds.
Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 189
1Using the Keyless Access System
*
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless
access system, the doors and tailgate will
automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access
system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
• Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while
someone else with the remote is within range.
• The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the keyless remote is within range.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 139 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
140
Controls
■
Locking the doors and tailgate
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door
or press the lock button on the tailgate.
u All the doors, fuel fill door, and tailgate
lock and the security system sets.
u Some exterior lights flash once and the
beeper sounds once.
1Using the Keyless Access System
*
• If you grip a front door handle or touch the front
door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor
may be slow to respond or may not respond by
locking/unlocking the doors.
• After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to
unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait
at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle,
otherwise the door will not unlock.
• The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors and tailgate
with the keyless remote if it is above or below the
outside handle.
• The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close
to the door, door glass and tailgate.
The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings
can be customized using the driver information
interface or audio/information screen.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
The keyless access system will not lock the vehicle
when a door is open.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Door Lock
Sensor
Lock Button
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 140 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
141
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
■
Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door and fuel fill door
unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors and the tailgate unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate outer handle:
u The tailgate unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate P. 154
Outer Handle
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 141 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
142
Controls
■
Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk
away auto lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle with all
doors and tailgate closed while carrying the
keyless remote, the doors and tailgate will
automatically lock.
The auto lock function activates when all
doors and tailgate are closed, and the keyless
remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the outside door handle or tailgate outer
handle.
Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and
close door(s) and tailgate.
1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated.
2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5
feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and tailgate will then
lock.
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
ON using the driver information interface or audio/
information screen.
If you set the auto lock function to ON using the
driver information interface or audio/information
screen, only the remote transmitter that was used to
unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting change
can activate auto lock.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
After the auto lock function has been activated,
when you stay within the locking/unlocking
operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote
will continue to flash until the doors and tailgate are
locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the
operation range, the doors and tailgate will
automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after
the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door or tailgate after the auto lock
function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock
function will be canceled.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
The activation range of
the auto lock function is
about 5 feet (1.5 m)
1
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 142 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
143
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
To temporarily deactivate the function:
1. Set the power mode to OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows:
LockUnlockLockUnlock.
u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function:
• Set the power mode to ON.
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function
• With the keyless remote on you, move out
of the auto lock function operation range.
• Open any door.
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock
function will not activate:
• The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
uThe beeper will not sound.
• The keyless remote is taken out of its operational
range before all the doors are closed.
uThe beeper will sound.
The auto lock function does not operate when any of
the following conditions are met.
• The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
• A door, tailgate or the hood is not closed.
• The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
• The keyless remote is not located within a radius of
about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get
out of the vehicle and close the doors and tailgate.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
• The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through
a window.
• You are located too close to the vehicle.
• The keyless remote is put inside the tailgate.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door
and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds
once.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 143 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
144
Controls
The vehicle will automatically lock after you
lock the doors in advance then close the doors
and tailgate.
Activate lock presetting after closing the
driver’s door.
1. Touch the door lock sensor on the driver’s
door
*
or press the lock button on the
remote transmitter.
u Alert sounds and lock presetting is
activated.
2. Close all doors and the tailgate.
u Some exterior lights flash and a beeper
sounds when vehicle locks.
Make sure the doors and tailgate are locked
before moving away from the vehicle.
■
Locking the doors and tailgate (lock presetting)
1Locking the doors and tailgate (lock presetting)
Lock presetting will be reset if a door or the tailgate is
opened before the vehicle has locked completely.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
inside the vehicle.
You can turn this function on and off.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Door Lock
Sensor
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 144 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
145
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■
Locking the doors and tailgate
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors,
fuel fill door, and tailgate lock, and the
security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u A beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.
■
Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.
Twice:
u The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote
transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically
relock.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote transmitter will not lock the vehicle when
a door is open.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE
OFF.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 594
LED
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 145 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
146
Controls
If the unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the built-in key
instead. The keyhole is on the back of the door handle.
Insert the built-in key into the key cylinder
from below the handle and then turn it.
■
Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn
the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock
the remaining doors and the tailgate.
If the lock button of the keyless remote does not
work, refer to the following.
2 Locking a Door Without Using a Key P. 147
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 146 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
147
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using
the key, you can lock the door without it.
■
Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■
Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
inside the vehicle.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 147 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
148
Controls
■
Lockout protection function
If the vehicle cannot detect the keyless
remote, lockout protection activates.
u A beeper sounds, some exterior lights
flash, the doors unlock, and a message
appears on the driver information
interface.
u This allows you to open a door in case
the keyless remote is still inside the
vehicle.
If you do not open a door, all doors relock
after 15 seconds.
To avoid non-detection, make sure to keep
the keyless remote away from cell phones and
other devices that may cause signal
interference.
■
Lockout prevention system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked
when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
You can change the lockout protection operation
setting.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with keyless access system
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with keyless access system
Models without keyless access system
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 148 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
149
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■
Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■
Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate
lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
To unlock
Lock TabTo lock
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 149 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
150
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors unlocking use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then
lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only.
If you do not want all the doors to unlock all the time, customize the Auto door
unlock
*1
/Auto Door Unlock
*2
setting to OFF using the driver information interface
or audio/information screen.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings P. 357
*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
■
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 151
Inner Handle
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 150 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
151
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all the doors, fuel fill door,
and tailgate.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■
When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using
the master door lock switch, all the other doors, fuel
fill door, and tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
To lock
To unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
■
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Lock
Unlock
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 151 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
152
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
■
Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■
Driver’s door open mode
All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the driver
information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 152 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
153
Controls
Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.
• Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 83
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to
put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo
area when closing the tailgate.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in
front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.
3
WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate
that is being opened or closed can be
seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the
tailgate before opening or closing it.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 153 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
154
uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Controls
Opening/Closing the Tailgate
When all the doors are unlocked or press the
tailgate unlock button on the remote
transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the
tailgate outer handle and lift open the
tailgate.
If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do
not have to unlock the tailgate before
opening it.
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.
If you close the tailgate when the driver’s door
is locked, the tailgate locks automatically.
u Some exterior lights flash.
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Make sure cargo or other items do not touch the
tailgate support struts.
Tailgate Support Struts
Outer Handle
Inner Handle
Models with keyless access system
All models
1Opening/Closing the Tailgate
• Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you
can unlock the tailgate while someone else with
the remote is within range.
• Do not leave the keyless remote inside the cargo
area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and
the tailgate cannot be closed.
Models with keyless access system
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 154 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
155
uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Controls
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the
tailgate.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using
the remote transmitter, when closing, the tailgate
locks automatically.
Tailgate
Unlock
Button
Tailgate
Unlock
Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 155 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
156
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the
engine.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and
audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or keyless access system
*
.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the
transmission is taken out of
(P or the hood is opened before the power mode is in
ON.
■
When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the
vehicle on the first time after the battery has been
disconnected.
Canadian models
1Security System Alarm
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
The security system alarm continues for a maximum
of two minutes until the security system alarm
deactivates.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 156 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
157
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■
To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, the remote transmitter or keyless access system
*
,
or set the power mode to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights,
is deactivated.
■
Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
• The hood is closed.
• All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the remote transmitter or
keyless access system
*
.
■
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds.
■
To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter or keyless access system
*
, or when the power mode is set to ON. The
security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
• Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may activate
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter,
or keyless access system
*
.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 157 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
158
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■
The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■
Canceling panic mode
• Press any button on the remote transmitter.
• Set the power mode to ON.
■
Panic Mode
Panic Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 158 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
159
Continued
Controls
Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and
close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.
■
Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■
Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close
Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
Power Window Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Indicator
Passenger’s
Window
Switch
*
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 159 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
160
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
■
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
While driving with any of the windows open, you
may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type
noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is
a normal occurrence that can be minimized.
If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the
windows open, lower all of the other windows
slightly or open the moonroof
*
.
Close
Open
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 160 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
161
uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows stop midway, repeat the
procedure.
Pull and hold the outer handle. Insert the key
into the key cylinder completely from below
the handle.
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows at the
desired position. If you want further
adjustment, repeat the same operation.
■
Opening the Windows with the Remote
1Opening the Windows with the Remote
If you open the windows with the remote
transmitter, the moonroof will open automatically
along with them.
You can turn off or on to open the windows with the
keyless remote setting using the driver information
interface or audio/information screen.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with moonroof
All models
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Unlock Button
■
Opening the Windows with the Key
1Opening the Windows with the Key
If you open the windows with the key, the moonroof
will open automatically along with them.
Models with moonroof
Open
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 161 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
162
Controls
Moonroof
*
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in
the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■
Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof automatically opens or closes
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
pull or push the switch briefly.
■
Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■
Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
■
Using the Moonroof Switch
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes
after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows with the Remote
P. 161
2 Opening the Windows with the Key P. 161
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 162 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
163
Continued
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
If you carry the keyless remote and press
ENGINE START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal, the power mode
will change in this order: VEHICLE
OFFACCESSORYON
VEHICLE OFF.
VEHICLE OFF:
Vehicle power is turned OFF.
ACCESSORY:
The audio system and some accessories can be
used.
ON:
All accessories can be used.
■
Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
If the keyless remote is set in a storage box or another
place where its signal can be interrupted, the power
mode may not change.
When the power mode is set to ON, the power mode
will change to ACCESSORY if the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pressed while the transmission is in a
position other than
(P.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 163 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
164
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
beep sound.
■
Automatic Power Off
■
Power Mode Reminder
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 164 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
165
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
When the power mode is set to any mode
other than OFF and you remove the keyless
remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an
alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to
sound, place the keyless remote in another
location.
■
When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.
■
When the power mode is in ON
An alarm will sound both inside and outside
the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator
will appear on the instrument panel.
■
Keyless Remote Reminder
1Keyless Remote Reminder
When the keyless remote is within the system’s
operational range, and all the doors are closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after
the engine has been turned on, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the keyless
remote is in your vehicle when you operate the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in
the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go
off. Under some other conditions that can prevent
the vehicle from locating the keyless remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the keyless
remote is within the system’s operational range.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 165 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
166
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
Controls
Lights
The lights will turn on automatically
depending on the ambient brightness. They
can also be switched on and off manually.
The exterior lights will switch on automatically
when the light switch is set to AUTO while
the power mode is in ON.
■
Manual operation
Headlights/parking lights:
Turn the light switch to .
Parking lights:
Turn the light switch to .
Headlight/parking lights off:
Turn the light switch to OFF and release it while the transmission is in
(P or the
parking brake is applied.
u The lights will come back on automatically when:
• The light switch is turned to OFF again and released.
• The transmission is changed out of
(P or the parking brake is released.
■
Headlights/Parking Lights
1Lights
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 96
1Headlights/Parking Lights
When the parking lights are on, the side marker, tail,
and rear license plate lights will also switch on.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
When the light switch is turned to or and
the power is turned to OFF, a beeper sounds when
the driver’s door is opened.
When the light switch is turned to AUTO and the
ambient light levels are low, the headlights and
parking lights will switch on if you unlock a door.
They will switch off when the door is locked.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 166 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
167
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
Controls
When the headlights are on, push the lever forward. Pull the lever back to return to
low beams.
■
Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back to switch on the high
beams.
u Release the lever to return to low beams.
■
High Beams
1Headlights/Parking Lights
The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do
not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise,
the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follow:
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Max
High
Mid
Low
Min
U.S. models
Bright
Dark
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 167 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
168
Controls
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■
: Turn signal
Push the lever up or down based on the
direction you want to turn, and the turn signal
will blink.
■
: One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push the lever up or down
and release it, the turn signal will blink 3
times.
u If you lightly push the lever in the
opposite direction while it is blinking, the
blinking will stop.
■
Turn Signals
1Turn Signals
The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will
blink when the external turn signal blinks.
2 Indicators P. 86
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 168 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
169
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the remote with you,
and close the driver’s door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the
AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
You can turn the headlight integration with wipers
function on and off.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 169 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
170
Controls
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is AUTO or .
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
While the vehicle is stopped, if you turn the light switch to OFF and release it, the
daytime running lights will turn off. When the transmission is changed out of
(P
and the parking brake is released, the lights will come on again. Otherwise, if the
light switch is once more turned to OFF, the lights will come on again.
■
Daytime Running Lights
1Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when
the headlight switch is in than when it is in
AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark,
the low beam headlights come on.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 170 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
171
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Continued
Controls
Auto High-Beam
The front wide view camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as
the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving
at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and
high beam depending on the situation.
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator
comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.
• The power mode is in ON.
• The light switch is in AUTO.
• The lever is in the low beam position.
• The headlights have been automatically
activated.
• It is dark outside the vehicle.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have
been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.
• Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
1Auto High-Beam
The auto high-beam system does not always operate
in every situation. This system is just for assisting the
driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch
the headlights between high beam and low beam
manually if necessary.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
The range and the distance at which the camera can
recognize varies depending on conditions
surrounding your vehicle.
Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to
the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
• Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
• Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
■
How to Use the Auto High-Beam
Front Wide View Camera
Light Switch
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 171 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
172
Controls
■
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low
beam based on the following conditions.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system
may not switch the headlights properly or the
switching timing may be changed. In case of the
automatic switching operation does not fit for your
driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
• Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,
electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating
the road ahead.
• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
• The road is bumpy or has many curves.
• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or
oncoming direction.
• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.
• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers.
• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low
beam when:
• Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
• The camera has detected a dense fog.
Switching to high beam:
All of the following conditions
must be met before the high
beams turn on.
• Your vehicle speed is 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more.
• There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicle with
headlights or taillights turned
on.
• There are few street lights on
the road ahead.
Switching to low beam:
One of the following conditions
must be met before the low beams
turn on.
• Your vehicle speed is 15 mph
(24 km/h) or less.
• There is a preceding or
oncoming vehicle with
headlights or taillights turned
on.
• There are many street lights on
the road ahead.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 172 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
173
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Controls
■
Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam,
follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-
beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever:
Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about
one second while driving.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the
high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will
come on.
Using the light switch:
Turn the light switch to .
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the
lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
How to turn off the Auto High-Beam System
You can turn the auto high-beam system on and off.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:
Camera temperature too high message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed toward the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:
Clean front windshield or poor viewing
condition. message appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 173 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
174
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■
MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the
wiper settings.
■
Adjusting wiper operation
*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
■
Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.
■
Windshield Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield
*
to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
Pull to
use
washer.
MIST
INT
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
*
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 174 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
175
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
■
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■
Washer ( )
Sprays on the rear window while you rotate
the switch to this position. Hold it to activate
the rear wiper and to spray the washer. Once
released, the washer spray will stop and the
rear wiper will return to its selected switch
setting after a few sweeps.
■
Operating in reverse
When you put the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
■
Rear Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as
the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove
the obstacle.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload.
Wiper operation will return to normal within a few
minutes.
ON: Continuous wipe
OFF
INT: Intermittent
Washer
Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent) Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe)
Continuous
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 175 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
176
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror
*
button to defog the rear window
and mirrors
*
when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirror
*
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, it does not automatically
switch off.
Heated Windshield Button
Press the heated windshield button to deice
the windshield at the wiper park area of the
windshield when the power mode is in ON.
The heated windshield will automatically
switch off after 15 minutes.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.
When the power mode is set to ON and the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door
mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.
Models with heated door mirror
Canadian models
1Heated Windshield Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 176 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
177
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. While the vehicle is stopped, push the
steering wheel adjustment lever down.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 177 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
178
Controls
Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you. Press
the AUTO button to turn this function on and
off. When activated, the AUTO indicator
comes on.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
1Interior Rearview Mirror
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Front Seats P. 180
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night
Position
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
The auto dimming function cancels when the
transmission is in
(R.
Sensor
Auto Button
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 178 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
179
uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■
Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 179 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
180
Controls
Seats
Front Seats
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■
Adjusting the driver’s power seat
*
1Seats
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
■
Adjusting the Seat Positions
1Front Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
1Adjusting the Seat Positions
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal
Position
Adjustment
Height
Adjustment
Seat-back
Angle
Adjustment
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 180 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
181
uuSeatsuFront Seats
Continued
Controls
■
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
*
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Driver’s seat is shown.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Pull up the lever to change the
angle.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 181 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuSeatsuFront Seats
182
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 182 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
183
uuSeatsuRear Seats
Continued
Controls
Rear Seats
The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.
■
To fold down the seat
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the
latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the
ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 47
3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
4. Pull the release lever and fold down the
seat-back.
To return the seat to the original position, pull
up the seat-back in the upright position.
■
Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the rear seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and
floor before you fold down the rear seat.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat
cushion are securely latched back into place before
driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center
shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 67
Anchor
Buckle
Latch Plate
Release Lever
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 183 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuSeatsuRear Seats
184
Controls
This feature alerts you to the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear
seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the power mode was set
to ON.
A reminder appears on the driver information
interface and an alert will sound when the
power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
■
Rear Seat Reminder
1Rear Seat Reminder
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the
reminder comes on briefly, then the function is
deactivated.
The reminder will not work if the power mode has
not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating
the rear doors.
The system does not detect passengers in the rear
seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is
opened and closed, indicating that there may be
something in the rear seats.
You can turn off the notification setting.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 184 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
185
uuSeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 185 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
186
uuSeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■
Adjusting the front head restraint positions
1Adjusting the front head restraint positions
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 186 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
187
uuSeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
A passenger sitting in a back seating position
should adjust the height of their head restraint
to an appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■
Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
To remove and install the head restraints, recline the
seat-back slightly forward as the space between the
ceiling and the seat-back is limited.
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 187 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
188
uuSeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
The console compartment can be used as an
armrest.
■
Using the Front Seat Armrest
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 188 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
189
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■
ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF.
■
OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the
following situations:
• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open
it.
• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but
do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
P. 357
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you set the power mode to ON.
• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Door Activated Position
Off
On
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 189 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
190
Controls
■
Front seat
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the buttons.
■
Rear seat
The map lights can be turned on and off by
touching the map lights.
■
Map Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the
interior light on for an extended length of time when
the engine is off.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
mode, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.
1Map Light Switches
When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the map
light will not go off when you press the buttons or
touch the map lights.
Touch
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 190 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
191
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls
The cargo area lights come on when you open
the tailgate.
■
Cargo Area Lights
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 191 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
192
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
Storage Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
Press the button to open the console
compartment.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
■
Console Compartment
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 192 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
193
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
■
Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
■
Door beverage holders
Are located on both of front and rear door
side pockets.
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Front seat
Rear seat
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 193 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
194
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle.
The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor
can be used to install a net for securing items.
■
Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
■
Tie-down Anchors
1Tie-down Anchors
Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area
while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have
to brake hard.
Anchors
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 194 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
195
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
Fold the cargo area floor lid into three parts.
■
Cargo Floor Box
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 195 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
196
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
Other Interior Convenience Items
The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or
ON.
■
Cargo area
Open the cover to use it.
■
Accessory Power Socket
1Accessory Power Socket
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element. This can overheat the accessory power
socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the accessory
power socket with the engine is running.
When the accessory power socket is not in use, close
the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from
getting into the accessory power socket.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 196 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
197
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by
the mark as follows:
1. To turn the system on and off, press and
hold the (power) button.
u When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on.
2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device and the amber
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.
■
Wireless Charger
*
1Wireless Charger
*
RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This device and its antenna must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
In order to use safely:
• Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device.
• Do not open the charger case.
• Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact
your dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications,
attempt to correct the interference:
• Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few
seconds to turn off the charger.
Green Indicator
Charging Area
(Power) Button
Amber Indicator
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 197 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
198
Controls
■
When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Green
&
Amber
Blinking
simulta-
neously
There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.
Remove the
obstacle(s).
The device is not within the
charging area.
Pick up and reset the
device to the center of
the charging area
where is located.
The temperature of the wireless
charger pad increases.
Temporarily suspend
charging the device.
Wait for the
temperature to drop
and attempt to charge
the device again.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.
Contact a dealer for
repairs.
1Wireless Charger
*
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the
system for a long time when the engine is not
running. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual
that came with the compatible device you want to charge.
3
CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad
and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the
device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
benzine or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while
charging etc.
• Avoid spraying aerosols which may
come in contact with the charge pad
surface.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 198 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
199
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
1Wireless Charger
*
The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the
charging rate varies based on the device and other
conditions.
NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or
precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision
machines such as watches can be affected.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
• The device is already fully charged.
• The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
• You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV
station, electric power plant, or gas station.
• The device has a cover, case or accessories which
are not compatible with wireless charging.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 199 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
200
Controls
1Wireless Charger
*
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
• All the doors and the tailgate are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the keyless access system.
• The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.
If the device becomes too hot and its battery
protection function activates, it may charge
extremely slowly or no longer charge.
The temperature at which the battery protection
function activates depends on the device.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 200 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
201
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
The heated steering wheel can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
Press the button on the lower side of the
steering wheel.
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
Heated Steering Wheel
*
1Heated Steering Wheel
*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 201 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
202
Controls
The seat heaters can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is
turned off, the previous setting is maintained.
■
Front Seat Heaters
*
1Front Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced
by one level at a time until the front seat heaters
shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the
interior environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lowerlimb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 202 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
203
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO button indicator
*
/AUTO indicator
*
will go
off, but functions unrelated to the button that were
pressed will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Models without SYNC button
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
windshield
defroster vents
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Temperature
Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
AUTO Button
Fan Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
MODE Control
Dial
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 203 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
204
Controls
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
Pressing the button switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control
system may have reduced cooling performance.
Models with SYNC button
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
windshield
defroster vents
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial
AUTO Button
MODE Co
ntrol Button
(Recircu
lation)
Button
(ON/OFF) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Passenger’s
Side
Temperature
Control Dial
SYNC
(Synchronization)
Button
Fan Control Dial
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 204 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
205
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Continued
Controls
■
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 205 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
206
Controls
Pressing the button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
Models without SYNC button
Models with SYNC button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 206 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
207
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
■
To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
Models without SYNC button
Models with SYNC button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 207 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
208
Controls
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side in synchronization mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger’s side
temperature control dial to return to dual mode.
■
Synchronization Mode
*
1Synchronization Mode
*
When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s side temperature
can be set separately.
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronization mode.
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
Passenger’s Side
Temperature Control Dial
SYNC Button
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 208 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
209
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 209 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
210
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 210 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
This page intentionally left blank.
211
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 212
USB Ports......................................... 213
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 214
Audio Remote Controls.................... 215
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 219
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 220
Display Setup ................................... 221
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 222
Playing an iPod ................................ 224
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 227
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 230
Siri Eyes Free .................................... 234
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Smartphone Voice Recognition ........ 235
Apple CarPlay .................................. 236
Android Auto
TM
................................ 240
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 244
Start Up........................................... 245
Audio/Information Screen ................ 246
System Updates ............................... 257
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 263
Display Setup ................................... 264
Voice Control Operation .................. 266
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 269
Playing SiriusXM® Radio................... 273
Playing an iPod ................................ 284
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 287
Playing Bluetoo th® Audio ................ 290
HondaLink® ..................................... 293
Smart Shortcuts ............................... 297
Wi-Fi Connection............................. 300
Apple CarPlay .................................. 301
Android Auto
TM
............................... 308
Audio Error Messages ...................... 314
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 316
Customized Features................ 337, 345
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 369, 389
Refuel Recommend .......................... 408
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 211 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
212
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service
*
. It can also
play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.
*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio
*
is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio
*
,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 316
SiriusXM® Radio
*
is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM®
*
is a registered trademark of SiriusXM
Radio, Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
*2
*1
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 212 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
213
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports
Features
USB Ports
■
On the front panel
The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices,
playing audio files and connecting compatible
phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure
to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning
Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for
Android Auto, the USB cables should be
certified by USB-IF to be compliant with
USB 2.0 Standard.
■
On the undertray
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging
devices.
u You cannot play music even if you have
connected music players to them.
1USB Ports
• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
• We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
• Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
• Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
• We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
• Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does
not output 2.5A unless requested by the device.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the
port may generate noise to the radio station you are
listening to.
USB charge
On the front panel
On the undertray
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 213 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
214
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■
Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob for more than two
seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 214 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
215
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Continued
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FMAMUSB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/
Android AutoBluetooth® Audio
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press Up: To increase the volume.
Press Down: To decrease the volume.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone
Connection
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder/group.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder/group.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
SOURCE
Button
VOL(+/VOL(-
(Volume) Switch
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 215 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
216
Features
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press Up: To increase the volume.
Press Down: To decrease the volume.
1Audio Remote Controls
Press the (Home) button to go back to the home
screen of the driver information interface.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Left Selector Wheel
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
(Home) Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 216 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
217
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Continued
Features
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone
Connection
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 217 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
218
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Left Selector Wheel
• When selecting the audio mode
Press the (Home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
Roll up or down:
FM
AM
SXM
USB
Bluetooth
Apps
(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down
and then press the left selector wheel:
Back
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 218 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
219
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to display the menu
screen.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Menu Items
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 220
2 Display Setup P. 221
2 Customized Features P. 337
Press the buttons on the steering wheel to change
any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215
Touchscreen operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337
(Back)
Button
Selector Knob
MENU Button
Menu Display
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 219 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
220
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select an audio source.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select Sound Settings.
Select an item from the following choices:
• Bass / Treble: Bass, Midrange, Treble
• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader
• Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC)
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the
vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume
increases. As you slow down, audio volume
decreases.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 220 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can set the screen brightness separately for Day and Night modes.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Display Adjustment.
3. Select Day or Night.
4. Select the setting you want.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
You can adjust the settings by sliding or tapping on
the bar.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 221 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
222
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
RADIO Button
Press to select a band.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Buttons
Press or to search the
selected band up or down for a
station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency
for preset
memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
Select to display beyond preset 5.
>
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 222 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■
To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the station.
■
Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select Text.
■
Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Stop or press the button.
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 12 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the audio source selecting button on the
steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the station name is
displayed under the frequency. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the station
name disappears.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 223 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
224
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port, then press the MEDIA
button.
2 USB Ports P. 213
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
MEDIA Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Track Buttons
Press or to change
songs. Press and hold to move
rapidly within a song.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Shu
ffle Icon
Select to play all files in
the current category in
random order.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to play/pause a song.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 224 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Press to display the iPod music list.
2. Select a category.
3. Select an item.
u Select an item repeatedly until a desired
item you want to listen to is displayed.
■
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 225 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
226
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon
until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
■
To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in
a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Shuffle Icon
Repeat Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 226 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Ports P. 213
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Track Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Play Icon
Select to play a file
.
Random Icons
Select to play all files in the current category
in random order.
Pause Icon
Select to pause a file.
Repeat Icons
Select to repeat the current file.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 227 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
228
Features
1. Press to display a folder list.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a file.
■
How to Select a File from a Folder
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 316
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 228 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.
■
Random/Repeat
Select random or repeat icon.
■
To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Random
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random
order.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Repeat
Repeat track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Repeat Icons
Random Icons
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 229 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there is more than one paired phone in the
vehicle, the system automatically connects to the
prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone
in the Bluetooth Settings menu.
2 HFL Menus P. 372
To change the searched phone manually, select Go
to Device List.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is
unavailable. However, a second previously paired
phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting
Audio from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
MEDIA Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
MENU Button
Press to display the
menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your pho
ne
is connected to HFL.
Track Buttons
Press or to
change files.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat
the current file.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all
files in the current
category in
random order.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to
select an item, then
press to set your
selection.
(Back)
Button
Press to go back
to t
he previous
display.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to play/pause a file.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 230 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the
Bluetooth® Audio Source is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■
To play or pause a file
Select the play/pause icon.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you
may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Check the volume setting of your phone if the audio
volume is too loud or soft.
Play/Pause Icon
MEDIA Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 231 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
232
Features
1. Press to display the music search list.
2. Select a category.
3. Select an item.
u Select an item repeatedly until a desired
item you want to listen to is displayed.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 232 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
233
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon
until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
■
To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in
a selected list in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in
a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the functions may not be displayed.
Shuffle Icon
Repeat Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 233 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
234
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Features
Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
■
Using Siri Eyes Free
1Siri Eyes Free
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri
Eyes Free mode while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press until the display changes as shown.
Press and hold to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri Eyes Free
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 234 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
235
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmartphone Voice Recognition
Features
Smartphone Voice Recognition
You can use Smartphone Voice Recognition using the (Talk) button on the
steering wheel when your Android phone is paired to the Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
■
Using Smartphone Voice Recognition
1Using Smartphone Voice Recognition
Depending on your Android phone, you may need to
operate your phone.
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press to activate Smartphone Voice Recognition.
Press and hold to deactivate Smartphone Voice
Recognition.
While in Smartphone Voice
Recognition:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
Appears
when
Smartphone
Voice
Recognition
is activated
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 235 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port,
you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a
phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Ports P. 213
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
We recommend using the latest OS.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function,
press the PHONE button. While connected to Apple
CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If
you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn
Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your
iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 238
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is
not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Go back to the
audio screen
CONNECT Button
Press to
display Apple CarPlay screen
Apple CarPlay menu screen
: Go back to the
Apple CarPlay
Dashboard screen
: Go back to the
Apple CarPlay menu
screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 236 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
■
Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.
■
Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
■
Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
■
Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your
iPhone.
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
To adjust the ringtone volume, the guidance volume
of the navigation or Siri, or the audio volume, turn
the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the
sound you want to adjust is playing.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 237 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
238
Features
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the USB port, use the
following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed,
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 213
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.
■
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
■
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely
parked.
When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you
will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or
delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay:
Press the MENU button
Select Smartphone SettingsApple CarPlay
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 238 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
Press the (talk) button to activate Siri.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri.
• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
To adjust the guidance volume of Siri, turn the VOL/
AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while Siri is
activated.
(Talk) button:
Press to activate Siri.
Press again to
deactivate Siri.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 239 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
240
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Android Auto
TM
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port, Android
Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the
audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and
Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on
the screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Ports P. 213
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 242
1Android Auto
TM
We recommend that you update Android OS to the
latest version when using Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is
connected to Android Auto.
To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android
9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
Android Auto is a trademark of Google LLC.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 240 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
241
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
• Maps
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
• Phone
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
• Exit
•
Operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
TM
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the
Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
To adjust the ringtone volume, the guidance volume
of the navigation or voice recognition, or the audio
volume, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
knob while the sound you want to adjust is playing.
Go back to the
audio screen
CONNECT Button
P
ress to display Android Auto screen
Android Auto menu screen
Go back to the Android
Auto menu screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 241 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
242
Features
•
You can check Android notifications.
• (Android Auto Home)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that
appear just when they’re needed.
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port, Android Auto is
automatically initiated.
To enable Android Auto after connecting an Android phone to the system, select
Yes on the screen.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.
■
Auto Pairing Connection
■
Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or
delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you
have completed the initial setup:
Press the MENU button
Select Smartphone Settings Android Auto
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 242 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
243
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Press the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of
the screen.
To adjust the guidance volume of voice recognition,
turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while
the guidance is playing.
(Talk) button:
Press to operate
Android Auto with your
voice.
Press again to deactivate
voice recognition.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 243 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
244
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Home) button: Press to go to the home
screen.
2 Using the audio/information screen
P. 246
(Back) button: Press to go back to the
previous screen.
/ (Seek/Track) buttons: Press to
change songs.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
(Home) Button
(Back) Button
/ (Seek/Track) Buttons
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 244 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
245
uuAudio System Basic OperationuStart Up
Features
Start Up
The 9-in. Color Touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the data upload will be
displayed.
Select OK.
u If you want to change the settings for
data upload, select Data Sharing, then
select the ON/OFF settings on the Data
Sharing Setting screen.
u If you do not select OK, the system will
automatically be switched the home
screen after a certain period of time.
u If there is no registered device, select OK
and the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be
displayed.
■
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
2. Select Honda HR-V from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this
9-in. Color Touchscreen, select Search
for Devices, and then select your phone
when it appears on the list.
u If you check the box with Do not show
this again, this screen will not be
displayed.
1Start Up
Data Sharing Setting
ON: Available the data communication.
OFF: Not available the data communication.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 245 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
246
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
■
Using the audio/information screen
Press the button to go to the home screen.
Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.
■
Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 389
■
FM/AM/SiriusXM/USB/Bluetooth Audio
Displays the audio information for each.
■
Switching the Display
1Using the audio/information screen
Touchscreen operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 345
Home Screen
Button
All Apps
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 246 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
■
General Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 345
■
Navigation
*
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■
HondaLink®
Displays the HondaLink screen.
2 HondaLink® P. 293
■
Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 301
2 Android Auto
TM
P. 308
■
Vehicle Settings
Displays the vehicle settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 247 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
248
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■
Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History.
To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select “Trip A”
Reset Timing or “Trip B” Reset Timing.
■
System Updates
Updates the software version of the audio system.
2 System Updates P. 257
■
Clock
Displays the clock.
■
Smart Shortcuts
Displays the Smart Shortcuts screen.
2 Smart Shortcuts P. 297
■
Display Mode
Displays the brightness bar.
■
Compass
*
Displays the compass screen.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 248 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■
Import wallpaper
You can import up to 11 images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Ports P. 213
2. Press the button.
3. Select Clock.
4. Select Settings.
5. Select Clock Faces.
6. Select Add More.
u The image of the pictures stored in the
USB flash drive are displayed on the list.
7. Select a desired picture to import.
u Multiple pictures can be selected at the
same time.
8. Select OK.
u The selected pictures are displayed.
9. Select Transfer.
u It will return to the clock wallpaper
setting screen.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be
displayed on the driver information interface.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be less than 64 bytes.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 10 MB.
• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 2,304 pixels. If
the image size is less than 1,280 × 720 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
• If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 249 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
250
Features
■
Select wallpaper
1. Press the button.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Clock Faces.
5. Select a desired picture to set.
u The preview is displayed on the screen.
6. Select Save.
u The clock screen which the wallpaper has been set is displayed.
■
To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the button.
2. Select Clock.
■
Delete wallpaper
1. Press the button.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Clock Faces.
5. Select Delete Photos.
6. Select a desired picture to delete.
u Multiple pictures can be selected at the same time.
7. Select OK.
u The selected pictures are displayed.
8. Select Delete.
u It will return to the clock wallpaper setting screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 250 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■
To move to the next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
The home screen has 3 pages. You can add up to 6
pages.
Press the button to go directly back to the first
page of the home screen from any page.
Swipe
Icon
>
Icon
<
Current page position
<
>
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 251 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
252
Features
■
To add app icons on the home screen
App icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select All Apps.
3. Select the box checked on the desired apps.
1To add app icons on the home screen
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368
In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 252 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■
To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
4. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To move icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 253 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
254
Features
■
To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the header area.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
4. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To remove icons on the home screen
You cannot delete the All Apps icon.
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the
home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and
hold.
Drag and drop to
the header area.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 254 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■
To shortcut icons on the home screen
You can store up to six icons on the bottom of the home screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to
the bottom of the home screen.
u The icon is a shortcut.
4. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To shortcut icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop
to shortcut
icon.
Shortcut
Icons
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 255 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
256
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
1. Select the system status icon.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Press the button or select the system
status icon to close the area.
■
Status Area
Status Area
System Status
Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 256 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
System Updates
The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB
device.
When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the status
area. Use the following procedure to update the system.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on
the home screen, select All Apps.
u The system will check for updates.
u If the update icon appears on the home
screen, select the status icon.
2 Status Area P. 256
3. Select Download.
u A notification appears on the screen for
the user to accept the download.
4. Select Install Now or Install While
Vehicle Off.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
■
How to Update
1How to Update
You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use
the captive portal that require login or agreement the
terms of use on the browser.
Your download will be canceled if:
• Your Wi-Fi connection is severed.
• You stop the engine when the battery is low on
power.
Your download will recommence the next time a Wi-
Fi connection is established.
For the battery protection, Install While Vehicle Off
cannot be selected when the battery is low on power.
If you want to install the updated data, recharge the
battery or select Install Now.
Notification
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 257 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
The following settings can be set.
• Automatic Download
• Version Status
• Connection Setup
• Automatic Update
*
• Update History
■
Automatic download settings
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Automatic Download.
5. Select the access point, then select Allow.
u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Block.
■
View a version and update status
Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Version Status.
■
System Updates Settings
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 258 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
■
Connection setup
Use the following procedure to connect to the Internet via a Wi-Fi network.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Connection Setup.
5. Select OK.
6. Select an access point from the network list.
u To connect to a hotspot that is not automatically detected, select Options
then Add Network.
7. Enter the password.
u If you check the Use this network to automatically download system
updates box, you can set the network to be used for system updates.
8. Select Connect.
■
Automatic update settings
*
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic update setting.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Automatic Update.
5. Select Accept.
u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Decline.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 259 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
260
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features
■
View the update history
Use the following procedure to confirm the update history.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Update History.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 260 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
■
Wireless connection mode setup
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Connection Setup.
5. Select OK.
6. Select an access point from the network list.
u To connect to a hotspot that is not automatically detected, select Options
then Add Network.
7. Enter the password.
u If you check the Use this network to automatically download system
updates box, you can set the network to be used for system updates.
8. Select Connect.
■
How to update
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select via Wireless.
4. Select Download.
u A notification appears on the screen for the user to accept the download.
5. Select Install Now or Install While Vehicle Off.
u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.
■
How to Update Wirelessly
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 261 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
262
Features
■
Download the update files from the server
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.
3. Select Other Methods.
4. Select Via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
5. Connect a USB device into the USB port.
u The inventory data is copied into the USB device.
2 USB Ports P. 213
6. Remove the USB device from the USB port.
7. Connect the USB device into your computer, and then download the update files.
u Follow the link to download the required software update files. Refer to
https://usb.honda.com for instructions.
■
Update the audio system
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Other Methods.
4. Select Via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
5. Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port.
u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Ports P. 213
6. Select Install Now.
u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.
■
How to Update with a USB Device
1How to Update with a USB Device
A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space
or more is recommended.
Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update
files from the USB before starting the USB update
process.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 262 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the button.
2. Select an audio source icon.
3. Select Sound.
Select an item from the following choices:
• Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader
• Speed Volume Compensation: Set the
amount of volume increase.
1Adjusting the Sound
The Speed Volume Compensation adjusts the
volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go
faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down,
audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound by the following
procedure.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Balance /
Fader, and Speed Volume Compensation, select
Default on each setting screen.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 263 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
264
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can set the screen brightness.
Select Display Mode.
u The brightness bar is displayed for a few
seconds.
u Select or to adjust the brightness.
u Select Display OFF to turn off the
screen. To turn on the screen, press the
or button.
■
Switching Display Mode Manually
1Display Setup
You can adjust the screen brightness by sliding or
tapping on the brightness bar.
You can also change the screen brightness on the
following procedures.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Display.
4. Select the setting you want.
To reset the settings, select Default.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 264 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Select Audio Source in the header area, then select an icon on the source list to
switch the audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
Selecting an Audio Source
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Select Audio Source
Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 265 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
266
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the (Talk) button on the steering wheel and a
microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
The system recognizes only certain commands.
Available voice commands:
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 267
• Close the windows and moonroof.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
■
Voice Recognition
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 266 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Continued
Features
When the (talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Help”
after the beep.
Depending on the selected mode, the
displayed commands are different on the
voice portal screen. The commands
recognized are the same regardless of
which screen is selected.
Normal Mode: A list of example commands
is displayed to quickly complete your
desired function.
Assist Mode: A list of basic commands is
displayed to guide you step by step through
the voice menu.
■
Voice Portal Screen
You can change the mode on the General
Settings screen.
2 Voice Control P. 356
The system only recognizes the commands
on the following pages, at certain screens.
Free-form voice commands are not
recognized.
When the voice portal screen is displayed, it
will change to the top screen of each
function by using the global commands.
• Music Search
• AM
• FM
• Sirius XM
• Navigation
*
• Phone
When the system recognizes a phone
command, the screen will change to the
dedicated phone voice recognition screen.
These commands can only be used when a
phone is connected.
■
General Commands
■
Phone Commands
■
Phone Commands
• Call <name>
• Call <number>
The system only recognizes contact names
stored in the phonebook of your phone. If a
full name is registered in the first name
field, the system will recognize the first
name and last name as one contact name.
Phone commands are not available if using
Apple CarPlay.
When the system recognizes an audio
command, the screen will change to the
dedicated audio voice recognition screen.
■
FM Commands
• Tune to <FM frequency>
■
AM Commands
• Tune to <AM frequency>
■
Sirius XM Commands
• Tune to SXM <channel number>
• Tune to SXM <station name>
■
Audio Commands
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 267 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
268
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
■
iPod Commands
• List Album <name>
• List Artist <name>
• List Genre <name>
• List Playlist <name>
• Play <artist> <album>
• Play
• Play Album <name>
• Play Artist <name>
• Play Genre <name>
• Play Music <text:media_combo>
• Play Playlist <name>
• Play Song <name>
■
USB Commands
• List Album <name>
• List Artist <name>
• List Playlist <name>
• Play <artist> <album>
• Play
• Play Album <name>
• Play Artist <name>
• Play Music <text:media_combo>
• Play Playlist <name>
• Play Song <name>
The screen will change to the navigation
screen when a navigation voice command is
received.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
• Voice Help
• Cancel
• Back
Voice Help provides guidance for the
current screen.
• Previous
• Next
• Yes
• No
■
Navigation Commands
*
■
Standard Commands
■
List Commands
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 268 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
269
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Buttons
Press or to search the selected band up
or down for a station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and
off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Settings Icon
Select whether to tune to HD
Radio
TM
automatically.
Tune Icon
Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering
the radio frequency directly.
Audio/Information Screen
Scan Icon
Select to sca
n each
station with a strong signal.
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset
memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to
store that station. Select to
display beyond preset 5.
>
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 269 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
270
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset station.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select the station.
■
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Preset Memory
■
Station List
1Preset Memory
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source
on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset
memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD
Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and
“ARC” logos are registered trademarks or
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 270 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or press the button.
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio
TM
station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select HD Radio Channels.
2. Select the channel number.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■
To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the station.
■
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Scan
■
HD Subchannel
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 271 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
272
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Change the AM/FM settings.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select an option.
• HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to
analog only.
• Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.
■
AM/FM Settings
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 272 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
273
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Continued
Features
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
Channel Icons
Select or to the previous or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
Settings Icon
Select settings to display and
customize SiriusXM® settings.
Category Icons
Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category.
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset
mem
ory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store
that station. Select to display beyond
preset 5.
>
Seek Buttons
Press or to search the selected band
up or down for a station with a strong signal.
Album Art
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and
off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 273 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
274
Features
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel or Category.
■
To Change the Tune Mode
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode
Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source
on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 215
Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off by the
following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Start.
3. Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or
select More and then select Category List.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 274 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that channel.
u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset channel.
■
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create
TuneMix.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
■
Preset Memory
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
TuneMix
TM
is a registered trademark of SiriusXM®
Radio, Inc.
TuneMix:
The multi-channel preset function can be turned on
or off by the following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select TuneMix.
3. Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select
Replace Preset.
If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix,
and then select the channel you want to delete.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 275 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
276
Features
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select More.
2. Select Category List.
3. Select Featured Favorites.
4. Select the featured favorite list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
5. Select the channel.
■
Listening to Featured Channels
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to 10 featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
To switch the sorting method, select Number or
Name on the upper right of the screen.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the channel number directly.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 276 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s
broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting
from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the
system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You
can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .
To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.
■
Returning to real-time broadcast
Select and hold .
■
Replay Function
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to
the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is turned off as it erases memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
(D): Play/Pause icon
When you listen a multi-channel preset while at the
playback mode, the replayed segment is not
displayed.
Audio/Information Screen
(C)
(B)
(A)
(D)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 277 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
278
Features
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
the games of your favorite teams.
■
To set up a favorite team
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Favorite Teams.
4. Select + Add Favorite Team.
5. Select a team.
■
To set up an alert message
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications.
5. Select Notifications.
6. Select ON.
7. Select a favorite team.
■
Receiving a sports alert
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert.
2. Select Listen.
u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.
2 Replay Function P. 277
To go back to the previous screen, select .
■
Live Sports Alert
1Live Sports Alert
The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert
function.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 278 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features
You can receive traffic and weather information.
■
To set up a traffic & weather information
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup.
3. Select Selected City.
4. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select No Market
Selected.
■
Listening a traffic and weather information
1. Select the status icon.
2. Select the traffic and weather information.
u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.
2 Replay Function P. 277
To go back to the previous screen, select .
■
Traffic and Weather Information
1Traffic and Weather Information
When traffic and weather information is received, a
notification is displayed in the header area.
2 Status Area P. 256
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 279 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
280
Features
You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is
about to start.
■
To view a channel schedule
1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.
■
To set up an alert message
1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.
3. Select a program.
4. Select Set Program Alert.
5. Select Just Once or Every Time.
■
Channel Schedule
1Channel Schedule
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
entering the channel number directly.
1To set up an alert message
The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert
function.
Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next
time you turn the power mode to ON.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.
To enable an alert message, change settings for the
alert function.
2 To enable the alert function P. 281
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 280 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Continued
Features
You can change settings for the alert function.
■
To enable the alert function
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select ON or OFF.
■
To remove an alert
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Alerts Set.
4. Select on the alert you want to delete.
■
Manage Program Alert
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 281 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
282
Features
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Scan Mode.
3. Select Channel or Preset.
To turn off scan, select Stop.
■
Scan
1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
TuneScan
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured Favorites
TM
technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScan
TM
and Featured Favorites
TM
are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 282 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features
Change the SiriusXM® settings.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select an option.
• TuneMix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.
• Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when
changing channels.
2 To Change the Tune Mode P. 274
• Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets.
2 Scan P. 282
• Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to
a music channel preset.
2 Tune Start: P. 274
• Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your
favorite teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 278
• Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information.
2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 279
• Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function.
2 Manage Program Alert P. 281
■
SiriusXM® Settings
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 283 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
284
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port, then select the USB
mode.
2 USB Ports P. 213
Track Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all files in the current
category in random order.
Cover Art Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
(B
ack) Button
Pres
s to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
Track Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Browse Icon
Select to display the menu items.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 284 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
285
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find
the song of your choice.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone or a smartphone is connected via Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto, the iPod/USB source will be
unavailable and audio files on the phone will be
playable only within Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 285 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
286
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon
until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
■
To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in
a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
Repeat Icon
Shuffle Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 286 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
287
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, AAC
*1
, FLAC, or WAV format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Ports P. 213
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Track Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Random Icon
Select to play all files in the current
category in random order.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
(Back) Butt
on
Press to go bac
k to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
Browse Icon
Select to display the menu items.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 287 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
288
Features
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find
the song of your choice.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 316
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 314
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 288 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
289
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
■
Random/Repeat
Repeatedly select the random or repeat icon
until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
■
To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Random
Random off: Random mode to off.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random
order.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Repeat Icon
Random Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 289 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
290
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there is more than one paired phone in the
vehicle, the system automatically connects to the
prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone
in the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is
unavailable. However, a second previously paired
phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting
from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Audio/Information Screen
Browse Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Play/Pause Icon
Bluetooth Indicat
or
Appears when your phone
is connected to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or to change tracks.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the
current track.
(Back) Button
Press to go back
to the previous
display.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all files
in the current
category in random
order.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 290 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
291
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■
To play or pause a file
Select the play/pause icon.
1. Select Browse.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting
Change Device.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
■
Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 291 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
292
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon
until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
■
To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a
selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Repeat Group: Repeats the current group.
Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the functions may not be displayed.
Repeat Icon
Shuffle Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 292 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
293
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 300
2 Phone Setup P. 394
■
Connect
Displays the connection status of the vehicle.
■
Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via roadside or customer service
center.
■
Message
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
■
HondaLink® Menu
1HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be connected
through Wi-Fi.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 293 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
294
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.
■
To enable the HondaLink® service
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Data Sharing Setting.
5. Select ON.
■
To link with HondaLink®
You can see the connection guide screen after
launching HondaLink® when there is no
connection to a network. If you do not need
this guide, select check-box and select OK.
■
To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 294 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
295
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A notification appears and notifies you of a
new message in the header area.
2. A notification icon is continuously displayed
in the header area until the new message is
read.
■
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Notification
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 295 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
296
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features
3. Select the system status icon to see the
messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 296 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
297
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts
Continued
Features
Smart Shortcuts
By observing and learning driver behaviors, patterns, and preferences, the system
anticipates driver actions and presents on-screen suggestions to help perform
desired actions quicker and with fewer steps.
• The app will suggest actions based on what it learns you do often, and
occasionally make recommendations based on your learned preferences.
• The system will take some time to learn. The more you interact with the system,
the more suggestion you will see, and the more accurate they will become.
• Suggestions will automatically refresh periodically to provide updated content for
each profile.
• You can also provide feedback on whether a suggestion is helpful by pressing and
holding on it. This can help the app grow smarter over time.
• To change the notifications behavior for Smart Shortcuts:
1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen.
2. Select Suggestion Settings.
3. Select an option.
• All data used for Smart Shortcuts can be erased by a Factory Data Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368
1Smart Shortcuts
The app also supports different profiles for each user,
with customized learning for each profile. The app
will also learn to associate a profile to a user over time
based on key fob and connected phone data.
Smart Shortcuts Screen Shortcut Suggestion
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 297 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts
298
Features
1. Press the button.
2. Select Smart Shortcuts.
3. Select a shortcut to take the action
suggested.
• Call Suggestions: When selected, a call to the contact or number suggested will
be placed and shown. Based on your calling patterns, contacts will be suggested
for you to call.
u Connect your smartphone through Bluetooth® to get contact suggestions.
u Call suggestions will not be displayed when you are connected to Apple
Carplay.
• Navigation Suggestions
*
: When selected, a route will be started to the
suggested destination and the embedded navigation app will open.
u When a long route is set in your navigation system, you can receive
recommendations for gas stations and places to stop at along the way.
u The places you frequently navigate to while using the embedded navigation
system will be suggested as shortcuts.
u Save your home location in the embedded navigation app to have a shortcut
suggestion for it when you’re away from home.
■
How to Use
1How to Use
You can change the profile by selecting on the
top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.
You can customize the following items by selecting
Options on the top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.
• Profiles: Create, change, and manage profiles.
• View App Walkthrough: View the Smart
Shortcuts walkthrough.
• Suggestion Settings: Change where suggestions
can appear.
To create a profile:
1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen.
2. Select Profiles.
3. Select Manage Profiles.
4. Select + Add New Profile.
5. Enter name for your profile.
6. Select Done.
uA new profile has been created and the Smart App
will automatically switch to that profile.
To change a profile:
1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen.
2. Select Profiles.
3. Select Change Current Profile.
4. Select a profile from the list.
uThe change to the selected profile has been made.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 298 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
299
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts
Features
• Radio Suggestions: When selected, the corresponding radio app (FM, AM, or
SiriusXM®) will open and it will start playing the station.
u From radio apps you can receive:
- FM, AM, SiriusXM®: Most frequently listened stations you may like to play
next.
- FM, SiriusXM®: Genre-based suggestions.
u Considerations:
- FM suggestions will appear only when they are within range, according to
your vehicle’s tuner signal.
- SiriusXM® suggestions will be available as long as there is an active account in
the vehicle.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 299 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
300
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Wi-Fi Connection
This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-
Fi hotspot or communication device.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Wi-Fi.
5. Select OK.
6. Select an access point from the network list.
u To connect to a hotspot that is not
automatically detected, select Options
then Add Network.
7. Enter the password.
u If you check the Use this network to
automatically download system
updates box, you can set the network to
be used for system updates.
2 System Updates P. 257
8. Select Connect.
■
Turning off the Wi-Fi connection
1. Select Change Mode.
2. Select OFF.
■
Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot
1Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of
Wi-Fi Alliance®.
1Connect the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Hotspot
You cannot go through the setting procedure while
the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the
audio system in Wi-Fi mode.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the icon on the system status area.
Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 300 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
301
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Continued
Features
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port
or wirelessly, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone
display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access
messages.
2 USB Ports P. 213
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
We recommend using the latest OS.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function,
select Phone on the home screen. While connected
to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple
CarPlay. If you want to make a call with
HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 303
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is
not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Go back to the
home screen
Home screen
Apple CarPlay icon
Apple CarPlay menu screen
: Go back to the
Apple CarPlay
Dashboard screen
: Go back to the
Apple CarPlay menu
screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 301 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
302
Features
■
Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.
■
Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
■
Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
■
Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your
iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
Models with navigation system
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 302 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
303
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the USB port or wirelessly,
use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result
in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location,
speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will
need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 213
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings
menu.
■
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
■
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely
parked.
When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you
will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or
delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay:
Press the buttonSelect General Settings
Smartphone ConnectionApple CarPlay
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 303 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
304
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Smartphone Connection.
3. Select + Connect New Device.
4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
5. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
6. Select Yes or No.
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Apple CarPlay device list
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Smartphone Connection.
4. Select Apple CarPlay.
5. Select + Connect New Device.
6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
7. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
8. Select Yes or No.
■
Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 304 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
305
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Continued
Features
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Bluetooth.
5. Select + Connect New Device.
6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
7. Check the box on Apple CarPlay.
u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
8. Select Connect.
9. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
10. Select Yes or No.
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel
1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel.
2. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
3. Check the box on Apple CarPlay.
u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
4. Select Connect.
5. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
6. Select Yes or No.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 305 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
306
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone
paired to the system)
1. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.
2. Select OK.
u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed.
u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be
displayed.
3. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
4. Check the box on Apple CarPlay.
u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
5. Select Connect.
6. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
7. Select Yes or No.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 306 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
307
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features
Press and hold the (talk) button to activate Siri.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri.
• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
Press and release to activate
standard voice recognition system.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 307 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
308
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Android Auto
TM
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port or
wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android
Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps
(Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a
tutorial will appear on the screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Ports P. 213
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 309
• Maps
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
TM
We recommend that you update Android OS to the
latest version when using Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is
connected to Android Auto.
To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android
9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
Android Auto is a trademark of Google LLC.
Android Auto menu screenHome screen
Android Auto icon
Go back to the
home screen
Go back to the Android
Auto menu screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 308 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
309
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
• Phone
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
• Exit
•
Operate Android Auto with your voice.
•
You can check Android notifications.
• (Android Auto Home)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that
appear just when they’re needed.
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port or wirelessly,
Android Auto is automatically initiated.
■
Auto Pairing Connection
1Android Auto
TM
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the
Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 309 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
310
Features
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 213
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Android Auto, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings
menu.
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Smartphone Connection.
3. Select + Connect New Device.
4. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
5. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist
appears.
6. Select Yes or No.
■
Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
■
Connect Android Auto Wirelessly
1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or
delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you
have completed the initial setup:
Press the button Select General Settings
Smartphone Connection Android Auto
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 310 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
311
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Continued
Features
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Android Auto device list
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Smartphone Connection.
4. Select Android Auto.
5. Select + Connect New Device.
6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
7. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist
appears.
8. Select Yes or No.
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Bluetooth.
5. Select + Connect New Device.
6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
7. Check the box on Android Auto.
u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
8. Select Connect.
9. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist
appears.
10. Select Yes or No.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 311 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
312
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel
1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel.
2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
3. Check the box on Android Auto.
u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
4. Select Connect.
5. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist
appears.
6. Select Yes or No.
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone
paired to the system)
1. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.
2. Select OK.
u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed.
u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be
displayed.
3. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
4. Check the box on Android Auto.
u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
5. Select Connect.
6. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist
appears.
7. Select Yes or No.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 312 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
313
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Press and hold the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to operate Android
Auto with your voice.
Press and release to activate
standard voice recognition system.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 313 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
314
Features
Audio Error Messages
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Error Message Solution
Bad USB Device
Please check owners manual
*1
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.
Connect Retry
*1, *2
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
*1, *2
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about a few seconds, then plays the next file.
No Data
*1, *2
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or
WAV files in the USB flash drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
*1, *2
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 314 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
315
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Error Message Solution
Device No Response
*1, *2
Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears
when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.
USB hub not supported
*1, *2
Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the
HUB.
A charging error has occurred with the
connected USB device. When safe please
check the compatibility of the device and
USB cable and try again.
*1, *2
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 315 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
316
Features
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on
the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to
subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering
wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.
*1
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription Updated:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Check Tuner:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.
Antenna Disconnected, Antenna Shorted:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
*1: ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon the channel selected.
■
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
■
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
• U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/
subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
• Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/
subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 316 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
317
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.
*1: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
■
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
Made for iPod touch (6th to 7th generation) released between 2015 and 2019
Made for iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/iPhone 6S
Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/
iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/iPhone SE
(2nd generation)/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/iPhone 12 mini
Model
Made for iPod touch (5th to 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015
Made for iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/
iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/
iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/
iPhone SE (2nd generation)/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/
iPhone 12 mini
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S,
iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus,
iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone
XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone
11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 12,
iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 12 mini,
iPod touch (5th
*1
, 6th, 7th
*2
generation).
The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s
*1
.
USB works with iPhone 4s
*1
, iPhone 5, iPhone 5s,
iPhone 5c, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone
6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8,
iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max,
iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro
Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 12, iPhone
12 Pro, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPod
touch (5th
*1
, 6th, 7th
*2
generation).
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
■
USB Flash Drives
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 317 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
318
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
Honda App License Agreement
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.
■
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 318 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
319
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License.
You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 319 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
320
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 320 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
321
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation.
The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE.
Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites:
The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 321 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
322
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates.
The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-
air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE.
Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1. Vehicle Geolocation Information.
You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 322 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
323
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition:
You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards.
Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 323 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
324
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
E. Information Collection and Storage
1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage.
Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information.
Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based).
If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 324 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
325
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-
infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability.
HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 325 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
326
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS
For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 326 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
327
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 327 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
328
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 328 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
329
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after
providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 329 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
330
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
■
OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 330 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
331
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
■
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 331 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
332
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
Features
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select License.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select About.
5. Select Legal Information.
6. Select License.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 332 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
333
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Continued
Features
License Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft.
■
Bluetooth
■
Windows Media
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 333 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
334
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Features
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone,
may affect wireless performance.
Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, iPod, iPhone, iTunes, Siri and
Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
■
Apple
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 334 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
335
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Continued
Features
Mpeg4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO
PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
■
MPEG
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 335 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
336
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Features
AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 336 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
337
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU
button. To customize the phone settings, press the PHONE button, then select
Settings.
■
How to Customize the Settings
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P.
To customize features detail, refer to the following.
2 Customization flow P. 338
2 List of customizable options P. 341
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Audio/Information Screen
MENU Button
Selector Knob
PHONE Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 337 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
338
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Customization flow
Press the MENU button.
Sound Settings
Bluetooth Settings
Bass / Treble
Balance / Fader
Speed Volume Compensation
Connect New Device
Change Device
Priority Device
Clock Settings
Smartphone Settings
Disconnect All Device
Delete Device
Automatic Time
Set Time
Time Zone
Apple CarPlay
Android Auto
Daylight Saving Time
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 338 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
339
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
RDS Settings
Display Adjustment
RDS Information
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Day
Night
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Language
Display OFF
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
License
Factory Data Reset
Rear Camera Setting
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 339 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
340
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Press the PHONE button and select Settings.
Bluetooth Settings
Ringtone
Connect New Device
Change Device
Priority Device
Disconnect All Device
Delete Device
Vehicle
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Phone
Hands-Free System Clear
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 340 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
341
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
List of customizable options
Press the MENU button.
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Sound Settings
Bass / Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’
sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 220
—
Balance / Fader
Speed Volume
Compensation
Bluetooth Settings
Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
—
Change Device
Connects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
—
Priority Device Sets a device as the priority device. ON
*1
/OFF
Disconnect All Device Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Clock Settings
Automatic Time
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically
adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this
function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Daylight Saving Time
Sets the clock to update based on daylight
savings time.
ON/OFF
*1
Set Time
Adjusts time.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134
—
Time Zone Changes the time zone manually.
Smartphone Settings
Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.
—
Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection.
RDS Settings RDS Information
Selects whether the RDS information comes
on.
ON
*1
/OFF
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 341 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
342
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Display Adjustment
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
Day
Changes between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and display off mode.
Night
Display OFF
Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. Normal
*1
/High
Rear Camera Setting
Fixed Guideline
Shows the guideline that does not move with
the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545
ON
*1
/OFF
Dynamic Guideline
Shows the guideline that moves with the
steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545
ON
*1
/OFF
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Shows arrows on the rear camera image to
indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor
*
P. 542
ON
*1
/OFF
Language Changes the display language. English
*1
/Español/Français
License Shows the legal information. —
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 344
—
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 342 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
343
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Press the PHONE button and select Settings.
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth Settings
Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
—
Change Device
Connects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 374
—
Priority Device Sets a device as the priority device. ON
*1
/OFF
Disconnect All Device Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Ringtone Selects the ringtone. Phone
*1
/Vehicle
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
ON
*1
/OFF
Hands-Free System Clear
Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.
—
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 343 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
344
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
3. Select Yes to reset the settings.
4. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 344 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
345
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select General
Settings and select a setting item.
■
How to Customize the General Settings
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P.
To customize features detail, refer to the following.
2 Customization flow P. 346
2 System P. 350
2 Smartphone Connection P. 353
2 Connections P. 354
2 Display P. 355
2 Sound P. 355
2 Camera P. 356
2 Voice Control P. 356
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Audio/Information Screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 345 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
346
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Customization flow
Press the button.
Automatic
Date & Time
Set Date
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Set Date & Time
Time Zone
System Sounds
Date & Time
System
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Date Format
Time Format
Text-to-Speech
Navigation Guidance
Phone Calls
Set Time
(Select time
zone)
System Volumes
Language
Default
Select General Settings.
Automatic
Time Zone
*
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 346 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
347
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Factory Data Reset
Status
Legal Information
Build Number
Data Sharing Setting
Model Number
Android Version
Kernel Version
App ManagerDetail Information
Refuel Recommend
*
About
+ Connect New DeviceApple CarPlay
Smartphone
Connection
Android Auto
(Saved Devices)
+ Connect New Device
(Saved Devices)
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 347 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
348
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Connections
Options
Options
Saved
Networks
Display
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Black Level
Default
Contrast
Change Mode
(Available Networks/
Connected Devices)
+ Connect New Device
(Saved Devices)
Bluetooth
Priority Device
Add Network
Brightness
Setup Network SSID
Wi-Fi Band
Security
Password
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 348 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
349
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Cross Traffic Monitor
Treble
Midrange
Bass / Treble
Camera
Bass
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Voice Control Mode
Rear Camera
Sound
Voice Control
Speed Volume
Compensation
Balance / Fader
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 349 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
350
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
System
*1:Default Setting
*2:Default Setting for U.S. models
*3:Default Setting for Canadian models
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Date & Time
Set
Date &
Time
Automatic
Date & Time
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the
clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Set Date
Adjusts date.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134
Day/Month/Year
Set Time
Adjusts time.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134
Hour/Minute
AM/PM
Time
Zone
Automatic
Time Zone
*
Sets the audio system to automatically adjust the clock
when driving through different time zones.
ON
*1
/OFF
(Select time
zone)
Changes the time zone manually. —
Auto Daylight Saving
Time
Sets the clock to update based on daylight savings time. ON
*1
/OFF
Date Format Select a date format.
MM/DD/YYYY
*2
/
DD/MM/YYYY
*3
/
YYYY/MM/DD
Time Format Select a time format. 12H
*1
/24H
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 350 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
351
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Language
Changes the driver information interface and audio/
information screen language separately.
English
*1
/Español/
Français
Touch Panel
Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Normal
*1
System Volumes
System Sounds Sets the system sound volume level. —
Text-to-Speech Sets the text-to-speech volume level. —
Navigation
Guidance
Sets the navigation guidance volume level. —
Phone Calls Sets the phone call volume level. —
Default Resets all System Volumes settings to default values.
Data Sharing
Setting
Turns the data sharing setting on and off.
2 Start Up P. 245
ON
*1
/OFF
Refuel Recommend
*
Turns the refuel recommend function on and off.
2 Refuel Recommend P. 408
ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 351 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
352
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
About
Status
Displays the Android setting items. —
Legal Information
Model Number
Android Version
Kernel Version
Build Number
Factory Data
Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 368
Continue/Cancel
Detail
Information
App Manager
Displays the Android system memory and apps
information.
—
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 352 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
353
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Smartphone Connection
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Apple CarPlay
+ Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to Apple CarPlay.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
—
(Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
—
Android Auto
+ Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to Android Auto.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
—
(Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
—
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 353 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
354
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Connections
*1:Default Setting
*2:Appears only when Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected wirelessly.
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Wi-Fi
Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode.
Network
*1
/
Smartphone
*2
/OFF
(Available Networks/Connected
Devices)
Displays the available network(s) or current connected
device(s).
—
Options
Add Network Adds a new network to connect Wi-Fi. —
Saved Networks Saves the connected network. —
Setup
Network SSID Sets the network name. —
Security Displays the network security. —
Password
Sets password for require entering password when
connecting Wi-Fi device to the network.
—
Wi-Fi Band Displays the Wi-Fi band. —
Bluetooth
Options
Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Priority Device Displays the priority device. —
+ Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
—
(Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
—
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 354 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
355
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Display
■
Sound
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen. —
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen. —
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen. —
Default
Resets all customized settings for the brightness,
contrast, and black level.
—
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bass / Treble
Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 263
—
Midrange
Bass
Balance / Fader
Speed Volume Compensation
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 355 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
356
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Camera
*1:Default Setting
■
Voice Control
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline
Shows the guideline that does not move with the
steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545
ON
*1
/OFF
Dynamic Guideline
Shows the guideline that moves with the steering
wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 545
ON
*1
/OFF
Cross Traffic Monitor
Shows arrows on the rear camera image to indicate
vehicles approaching from the sides.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor
*
P. 542
ON
*1
/OFF
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Voice Control Mode
Selects a mode of the voice portal screen.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 266
Assist/Normal
*1
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 356 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
357
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select Vehicle Settings
and select a setting item.
■
How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
Audio/Information Screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 357 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
358
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Customization flow
Press the button.
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Traffic Sign Recognition System Display Setting
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Blind Spot Info
Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning
Speed Limit Warning Threshold Setting
Driver Attention Monitor
Driver Assist System Setup
TPMS Calibration
*
Select Vehicle Settings.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 358 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
359
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Turn By Turn Auto Display
Speed/Distance Units
Keyless Access Light Flash
Rear Seat Reminder
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System ON/OFF
Lockout Protection
Keyless Access Setup
Meter Setup Adjust Outside Temp. Display
"Trip A" Reset Timing
"Trip B" Reset Timing
Adjust Alarm Volume
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Tachometer
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 359 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
360
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Auto Door Unlock
Auto Door Lock
Walk Away Auto Lock
Lock Presetting
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Door/Window Setup
Lighting Setup Auto High Beam
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
*
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
Remote Window Control
Select Reset ItemsMaintenance Info.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 360 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
361
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
TPMS Calibration
*
■
Driver Assist System Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS Calibration
Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 438
Calibrate/Cancel
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
Selects distance for Forward Collision Warning audible and visual
alerts.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 453
Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect
Beep
Turns On/Off audible notification when vehicle has moved in/out of
adaptive cruise control range.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 471
ON/OFF
*1
Road Departure Mitigation
Setting
Selects operating mode of the Road Departure Mitigation system.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 511
Narrow/Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Selects On/Off the LKAS alert for not detecting road lines.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491
ON/OFF
*1
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 361 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
362
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Blind Spot Info
Selects On/Off the blind spot information system audible alert.
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 445
Audible And Visual Alert
*1
/
Visual Alert
Traffic Sign Recognition
System Display Setting
Displays the traffic sign recognition system on instrument panel.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519
Display
*1
/None
Traffic Sign Recognition
System Speed Limit
Warning
Enables over speed limit warning when speed limit is exceeded.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519
ON
*1
/OFF
Speed Limit Warning
Threshold Setting
Select speed limit warning threshold based on personal preference.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 519
Speed Limit
*1
/
Speed Limit +3mph/
Speed Limit +5mph/
Speed Limit +10mph
(When mph is selected)
Speed Limit
*1
/
Speed Limit +5km/h/
Speed Limit +10km/h/
Speed Limit +15km/h
(When km/h is selected)
Driver Attention Monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 114
OFF/Tactile Alert/Tactile
And Audible Alert
*1
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 362 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
363
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Meter Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Selects to adjust outside temperature reading by a few degrees.
2 Outside Temperature P. 105
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C (Canada)
"Trip A" Reset Timing
Selects the timing to reset Trip A.
2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 109
2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 111
When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/
Manually Reset
*1
"Trip B" Reset Timing
Selects the timing to reset Trip B.
2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 109
2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 111
When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/
Manually Reset
*1
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes volume level of all system warnings, door opening
warning and indicator.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Turn By Turn Auto Display
Turns on/off the pop-up warning in the turn-by-turn navigation
in the driver information interface.
2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 113
ON
*1
/OFF
Speed/Distance Units
Selects the trip computer units.
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122
km/h · km/mph · miles
*1
(U.S.)
km/h · km
*1
/mph · miles (Canada)
Tachometer
Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver information
interface.
ON
*1
/OFF
Rear Seat Reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 363 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
364
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Keyless Access Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door
handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the
doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. ON
*1
/OFF
Remote Start System ON/
OFF
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Lockout Protection Changes the settings for the lockout protection function. ON
*1
/OFF
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 364 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
365
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Lighting Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Auto High Beam Turns on/off auto high beam function. ON
*1
/OFF
Interior Light Dimming Time
Selects the length of time the interior lights stay on after doors are
closed.
2 Interior Lights P. 189
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Selects the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close
the driver's door.
2 Automatic Lighting Off Feature P. 169
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity
*
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Min/Low/Mid
*1
/High/Max
Auto Headlight On with
Wiper On
Selects On/Off headlight function and wiper operation when the
headlight is in AUTO setting.
2 Headlight Integration with Wipers P. 169
ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 365 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
366
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Door/Window Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.
OFF/With Vehicle Speed
*1
/
Shift From P
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.
OFF/All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens
*1
/All
Doors When Shifted to
Park/All Doors With IGN
OFF
Walk Away Auto Lock
Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk
away from the vehicle.
ON/OFF
*1
Lock Presetting Changes the settings for the Lock Presetting function. ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Turns on/off flash of exterior lights when doors are locked/unlocked
by the keyless remote.
2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 155
ON
*1
/OFF
Remote Window Control Turns the remote window control on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 366 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
368
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings.
6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Vehicle Settings.
3. Select Default.
4. Select Yes.
■
Defaulting General Settings
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it goes offline.
2 HondaLink® P. 293
■
Defaulting Vehicle Settings
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 368 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
369
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Up to 20 favorite contacts can be stored. If there is no
entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears
on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 382
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Selector Knob
Left Selector Wheel
PHONE Button
VOL
(+/VOL (-
(Volume) Switch
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 369 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
370
Features
Left Selector Wheel: While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on
the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector
wheel.
2 Receiving a Call P. 387
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 370 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
371
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone
is connected to HFL.
Roam Status
Call Name
Call Number
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 371 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
372
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
PHONE button
Recent Calls
*1
All
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect New Device
Change Device
Connects a paired phone.
Priority Device
Sets a device as the priority device.
Bluetooth Settings
Keypad
*1
Settings
Favorite
Contacts
*1
(Existing entry list)
Contacts
*1
Dialed
Missed
Received
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last missed calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.
Display the phonebook of the paired phone.
Enter a phone number to dial.
Disconnect All Device
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
*1: Available only when a phone is connected to HFL.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 372 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
373
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Ringtone
Select the ringtone stored in the connected cell phone.
Phone
Vehicle
Select the ringtone stored in HFL.
Auto Phone Call
Transfer
Hands-Free
System Clear
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.
Clear the phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all
call history data, and all imported phonebook data.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 373 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
374
Features
■
To pair a cell phone (No phone has
been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
3. Select Yes.
u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.
4. Select Honda HR-V from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search from car
and follow the prompts.
When your phone appears on the list,
select it.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to the Bluetooth Settings
screen.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
: The phone can be used with HFL.
When pairing a phone from this audio system:
If your phone doesn’t appear on the audio/
information screen, select Search from phone and
search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select Honda HR-V.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 374 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
375
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Connect New Device.
u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 375 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
376
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
6. Select Honda HR-V from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search from car
and follow the prompts.
When your phone appears on the list,
select it.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
8. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at
the same time. Select Yes if you want to
prioritize the device.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 376 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
377
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Change Device.
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Select a desired device name.
6. Select Both, Audio, or Phone.
u When another device is connected to
Android Auto and you select Both or
Phone, a confirmation message appears.
Select Continue.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 377 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
378
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Delete Device.
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Select a phone you want to delete.
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
u When the device is connected to Android
Auto, a confirmation message appears.
Select Yes.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 378 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
379
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
If paring between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the
phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
4. Select ON or OFF.
You can change the ringtone setting.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Ringtone.
4. Select Phone or Vehicle.
■
Automatic Transferring
■
Ringtone
1Ringtone
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will
sound if the phone is connected.
Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the
speakers.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 379 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
380
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and
all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Hands-Free System Clear.
4. Select Yes.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
6. A notification appears on the screen. Select
OK.
■
To Clear the System
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 380 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
381
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to five category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Pager
Work
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 381 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
382
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
To add a favorite contacts
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.
3. Select the star icon.
3. Select Add to Favorite.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the favorite contact is successfully stored.
u To remove the favorite contact, select
the star icon again.
■
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Star Icon
Contacts Screen
Star Icon
Keypad Screen
Add to Favorite
On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen
On the Keypad screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 382 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
383
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To delete a favorite contact
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select the star icon.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
Star Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 383 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
384
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.
■
To make a call using the imported
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Contacts.
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Select a name.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 384 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
385
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■
To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed,
or Received.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or
Received. Select the icon on the upper
right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 385 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
386
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
To make a call using a favorite contact
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 386 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
387
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call...
screen appears.
You can answer the call using the left selector
wheel.
To pick the call, roll up or down to select
Answer on the driver information interface
and then press the left selector wheel.
u If you want to decline or end the call,
select Ignore on the driver information
interface using the left selector wheel.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Select Answer using the left selector wheel to put
the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Select Swap Calls using the left selector wheel to
return to the current call.
Select Ignore using the left selector wheel to ignore
the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.
Select Hang Up using the left selector wheel if you
want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the icons on the driver information
interface.
HFL Mode
Caller’s Name
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 387 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
388
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Swap Calls: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Keypad: Available on some phones.
Mute Icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 388 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
389
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be
ON. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay,
HFL is unavailable.
2 Customized Features P. 345
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press the button when you want to call a
number using a phonebook name or a number.
Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, the volume level is able
to change by the audio system’s volume.
If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the
pop-up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 400
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
(Talk) Button
Left Selector Wheel
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
(Home) Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 389 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
390
Features
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.
(Home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information
interface.
Left Selector Wheel: Press the (Home) button. Roll up or down to select
Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information
interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.
2 Receiving a Call P. 404
To go to the phone screen:
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 390 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
391
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 400
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected to
HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Caller’s Name (If
registered)/Caller’s
Number (If not
registered)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 391 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
392
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
■
Phone settings screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Settings.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
+ Connect New Device
(Existing entry list)
Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.
Change Devices
Pair a new phone to the system.
Auto Sync Phone
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Ringtone
HondaLink Assist
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.
Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 392 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
393
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
Phone menu screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.
All
(Existing entry list)
Display the last outgoing calls.
Recent Calls
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Favorite Contacts
Contacts
Keypad
Display the phonebook of the paired phone.
Enter a phone number to dial.
Dialed
Display the last missed calls.
Missed
Display the last incoming calls.
Received
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 393 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
394
Features
■
Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Bluetooth.
5. Select Options.
6. Select Bluetooth, then select ON.
■
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Connect New Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
4. Select Honda HR-V from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search for
Devices, and then select your phone
when it appears on the list.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the
screen and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. Select desired functions and then select
Connect.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or more icons on
the right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.
: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth-
compatible devices is unavailable.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 394 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
395
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
7. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
8. Select OK.
u A confirmation message for phone data
collection appears.
9. Select ON or OFF.
u A confirmation message for HondaLink
Assist appears.
10. Select Yes or No.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 395 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
396
Features
■
To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 392
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
u You can set the connected phone
priority. Select the box checked on the
phone you want to prioritize.
4. Select , , or .
u and can be selected
simultaneously, however, when or
is selected, and cannot be
selected.
5. Select Apply.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device
from the Bluetooth screen.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 396 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
397
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 392
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Options.
5. Select Delete Device.
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Delete.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 397 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
398
Features
You can change the ringtone setting.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 392
2. Select Ringtone.
3. Select Vehicle or Phone.
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 392
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
3. Select ON or OFF.
■
Ringtone
1Ringtone
Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the
speakers.
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will
sound if the phone is connected.
■
Automatic Transferring
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 398 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
399
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■
Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 392
2. Select Auto Sync Phone.
3. Select ON or OFF.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons
indicate what types of numbers are stored for that
name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
Pref
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 399 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
400
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
To add a favorite contacts
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.
3. Select the star icon.
3. Select Add to Favorite Contacts.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the favorite contact is successfully stored.
u To remove the favorite contact, select
the star icon again.
■
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Star Icon
Contacts Screen
Star Icon
Keypad Screen
Add to Favorite Contacts
On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen
On the Keypad screen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 400 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
401
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To edit a favorite contacts
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry
you want to edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
5. Select Done.
■
To delete a favorite contacts
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry
you want to delete.
4. Select Remove.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 401 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
402
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported Recent
Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts
entries.
■
To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Contacts.
3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last
Name. Select the icon on the upper right
of the screen.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with
HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple
CarPlay.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 402 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
403
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■
To make a call using a phone number
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed,
and Received.
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or
Received. Select the icon on the upper
right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using a favorite contacts
entry
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of favorite
contacts entries by selecting Reorder.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, missed,
or received calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 403 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
404
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call... screen appears.
You can answer the call using the left selector
wheel.
To pick the call, roll up or down to select
(answer) on the driver information interface
and then press the left selector wheel.
u If you want to decline or end the call,
select (ignore) on the driver
information interface using the left
selector wheel.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Select (answer) to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Select using the left selector wheel to return to
the current call.
Select (ignore) to ignore the incoming call if you
do not want to answer it.
Select if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and on the driver
information interface.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 404 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
405
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected when the other source screen
other than the phone screen is displayed.
Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Keypad: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 405 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
406
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist
Features
HondaLink® Assist
■
Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition can be sent to the
operator
*1
; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
be sent to the operator.
■
In Case of Emergency
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency service when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
• There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 406 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
407
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist
Features
■
To enable notification
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 392
2. Select HondaLink Assist.
3. Select Yes or No.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
• Yes: Notification is available.
• No: Disable the feature.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 407 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
408
Features
Refuel Recommend
Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically calculates when to refuel.
This feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to
search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle.
1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a
notification is displayed and a notification
icon is displayed in the header.
2. Touch the box that contains the icon.
3. Select Find Gas Station Now.
4. Choose a gas station from the search
screen of the navigation system.
u For instructions on how to use the
navigation system, refer to the
navigation system manual.
1Refuel Recommend
You can turn the Refuel Recommend function on
and off.
2 Customized Features P. 345
When you turn off this feature, the refuel
recommend notification will not display.
This feature can only be used when the fuel level in
the tank is below 30 percent.
If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more
than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the
notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer
not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for
Refuel Recommend.
When you drive on a rough road or ascend or
descend a hill for an extended period of time, the
notification may disappear or may not be displayed at
all.
Models with navigation system
Notification
icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 408 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
409
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .............................. 410
Maximum Load Limit............................ 413
Towing a Trailer
Towing Behind a Motorhome............... 415
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 416
When Driving
Starting the Engine .............................. 418
Precautions While Driving..................... 425
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 426
Shifting................................................ 427
Drive Mode Switch............................... 429
Hill Descent Control System ................. 432
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA
®
), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ...................434
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System
TM
*
.. 437
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)........... 438
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ............. 443
Blind Spot Information System
*
........... 445
Honda Sensing® ................................ 449
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ........................................... 453
Low Speed Braking Control
*
................ 465
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow ..................................... 471
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .......491
Traffic Jam Assist
*
................................502
Road Departure Mitigation System .......511
Traffic Sign Recognition System............519
Front Wide View Camera......................525
Sonar Sensors
*
.....................................527
Braking
Brake System........................................528
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................535
Brake Assist System ..............................536
Parking Your Vehicle
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 545
Refueling
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions.... 550
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 409 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
410
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 410 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
411
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Seats P. 180
2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 186
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Mirrors P. 178
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 177
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming
readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 411 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
412
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 86
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 412 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
413
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 838 lbs (380 kg).
See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 640
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 640
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 413 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
414
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer:
See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your
vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 415
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
838 lbs
(380 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
538 lbs
(244 kg)
Example2
Max Load
838 lbs
(380 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
88 lbs
(40 kg)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 414 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
415
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Behind a Motorhome
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 634
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 415 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
416
Driving
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
• Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
• Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
• Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
• It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 36
2 Precautions While Driving P. 425
3
WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-
pavement can cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers could be
seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
• Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 416 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
417
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Driving
Avoiding Trouble
• Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
• Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
• Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
• Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
• Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually
the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it
before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it.
Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around.
Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
• Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
• If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 417 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
418
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds
when you pull up to electric parking
brake switch.
2. Check that the transmission is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 418 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
419
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless
remote is weak.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
P. 614
The engine may not start if the keyless remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.If an improperly coded device is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 156
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 419 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
420
Driving
You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.
■
To start the engine
Press the button, then press and hold
the button.
u Some exterior lights flash once.
If the engine starts successfully, some exterior
lights flash six times.
If the engine does not start, exterior lights will
not flash.
u Go within the range, and try again.
■
Remote Engine Start
*
1Remote Engine Start
*
The remote engine start may violate local laws.
Before using the remote engine start, check your
local laws.
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can
rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly
enclosed areas.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Never use the remote engine starter with
the vehicle parked in a garage or other
areas with limited ventilation.
LED: Blinks when any
button is pressed.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 420 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
421
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling
and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed
simultaneously.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.
1Remote Engine Start
*
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the driver information interface
*
or audio/
information screen
*
.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
• The transmission is in a position other than (P.
• The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is
unlocked.
• You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
• Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
• There is any antenna failure.
• The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The security system alarm is not set.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 421 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
422
Driving
■
To stop the engine
Press and hold the button for one
second.
If the engine starts successfully, the exterior
lights flash once.
When the remote is out of the keyless access
system range, the exterior lights will not flash.
The engine will not stop.
u Go within the range, and try again.
1Remote Engine Start
*
The engine may stop while it is running if:
• You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the keyless remote.
• The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote.
• The security system alarm is not set.
• The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is
unlocked.
• You press the shift lever release button.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The battery is low.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is
a problem with the emissions control systems.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger, heated door mirrors
*
, front seat
heaters
*
and heated steering wheel
*
are activated.
2 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button P. 176
2 Front Seat Heaters
*
P. 202
2 Heated Steering Wheel
*
P. 201
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 422 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
423
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into
(D. Select
(R when reversing.
2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.
2 Parking Brake P. 528
■
Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into
(D, (S, or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
■
Starting to Drive
1Starting to Drive
The engine stops when the transmission is taken out
of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
When the engine was started using the button
on the keyless remote
*
When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote
*
When the engine was started in any case
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 423 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
424
Driving
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
■
Stopping the Engine
1Stopping the Engine
The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE
OFF about 20 minutes after the following conditions
have been met:
• A door has been opened, such as when leaving the
vehicle.
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The transmission is in ( P.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 424 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
425
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Continued
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
• Roof load capacity is 132 lbs (60 kg), available roof racks/carriers may have lower
capacities. Please check accessory’s information (Honda accessory).
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
■
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
■
In Rain
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not change the shift position while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under
these conditions can eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not select
(N while driving as you will lose engine
braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km)
after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the
brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 425 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission
426
Driving
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Continuously Variable Transmission
When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■
Other Precautions
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 36
2 Precautions While Driving P. 425
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 426 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
427
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■
Shift positions
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF unless the shift lever is in
(P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Drive
Used for normal driving
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
Release Button
Low
●
Used to further increase engine
braking
●
Used when going up or down hills
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 427 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
428
Driving
■
Shift Operation
1Shift Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift position from (D to (R
and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift position indicator to check the lever
position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when
driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with
the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Tachometer red zone
Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
Shift Position Indicator
(Transmission system indicator)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 428 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
429
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch
Continued
Driving
Drive Mode Switch
You can choose between three modes, NORMAL mode, ECON mode and SNOW
mode by using the drive mode switch.
The current mode is displayed on the driver information interface, and each mode
will appear differently.
1Drive Mode Switch
The mode may not be able to be changed when:
• The vehicle is turning.
• The VSA® system is activating.
• There is a problem with the engine, the
transmission, the VSA®, and the EPS.
Drive Mode Switch
NORMAL
Mode
ECON
Mode
SNOW
Mode
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 429 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch
430
Driving
Balances handling and riding in all
environments.
Helps you improve your fuel economy by
adjusting the performance of the engine,
transmission and climate control system.
■
NORMAL Mode
■
ECON Mode
1ECON Mode
While in ECON mode, the climate control system will
be less effective and the vehicle slower to accelerate.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 430 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
431
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch
Driving
Maximizes controllability through powertrain
settings.
The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.
■
SNOW Mode
1SNOW Mode
NOTICE
SNOW mode does not allow you to drive on snowy
or frozen roads in all situations. There are limits to
SNOW mode.
When driving on snowy or frozen roads; mount
winter tires or tire chains, reduce speed, and maintain
sufficient distance between vehicles.
■
Next Start-up Mode
Last Mode Next Mode
NORMAL NORMAL
ECON ECON
SNOW NORMAL
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 431 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
432
uuWhen DrivinguHill Descent Control System
Driving
Hill Descent Control System
When driving down hills where engine braking is not enough to decelerate the
vehicle, this system helps maintain a constant vehicle speed without needing to
depress the brake pedal.
The system operates under the following conditions.
• Driving at a speed between about 2-12 mph (3-20 km/h).
• Driving downhill.
• Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not depressed.
The system’s operating status
• Green: Activated
• White: Standby
Vehicle speed display
• White: Set speed
• Grey: Current speed
u Blinks when the vehicle speed is above
the operating speed.
■
Hill Descent Control Operating Conditions
■
Driver Information Interface Display
1Hill Descent Control System
The brake lights automatically come on while the
system is in operation.
The system may not operate when driving down a
gentle slope. Check the Hill Descent Control System
indicator to see if the system is in operation.
The system may activate even when not driving
downhill, such as when the vehicle leans while
driving over uneven surfaces.
3
WARNING
Hill descent control cannot maintain a
constant vehicle speed in every situation.
When driving down a very steep hill or on
slippery road surfaces, the vehicle may not
be able to maintain the vehicle speed and
could cause a crash, resulting in serious
injury or death.
Since Hill Descent Control is not designed
to increase the limits of vehicle
performance, the driver must always be
aware of road surface conditions and drive
safely.
System’s Operating Status
Vehicle Speed
Display
Current Speed
Operating Range of Set Speed
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 432 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
433
uuWhen DrivinguHill Descent Control System
Driving
■
To turn the system on
When the vehicle speed is less than about
12 mph (20 km/h), press the button to
turn the system on.
u The system goes into standby mode, and
the Hill Descent Control System indicator
(white) comes on.
When all the working conditions are met, the
system activates, and the vehicle begins to
maintain the vehicle speed when driving
downhill.
u The Hill Descent Control System indicator
(green) comes on when operating.
■
To adjust the set speed
Depress the accelerator pedal or brake pedal
to adjust the vehicle speed within the
operating range. The vehicle speed at which
you release the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal will be the set speed.
■
To turn the system off
Press the button to turn the system off.
■
How to Operate Hill Descent Control
1How to Operate Hill Descent Control
Using the system repeatedly for a long time may
cause the brakes to heat up and make the system go
into standby mode temporarily.
Hill Descent Control is turned off every time you turn
the power system off, even if it was turned on the last
time you drove the vehicle.
The pedals may vibrate or you may hear the system
working when in operation.
Hill Descent Control
System Indicator
(Hill Descent Control) Button
1To turn the system off
When the vehicle speed is 37 mph (60 km/h) or more,
the system turns off automatically.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 433 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
434
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic brake system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
, parking brake and brake system and safety
support indicators may come on in amber along with
a message in the gauge when you set the power
mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
VSA® System
Indicator
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 434 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
435
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and
cornering ability, but traction control function
will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® On and Off
1Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 435 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
436
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Driving
Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and
helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.
1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 436 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
437
uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control System
TM
*
Driving
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System
TM
*
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of
front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This
allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front
wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.
1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System
TM
*
NOTICE
Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD system may not function properly if tire
type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same
size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 588
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 437 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
438
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated.
This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator to come on and a message to appear
on the gauge.
U.S. models only
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of overinflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Tire chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
• Tire chains are used.
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 438 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
439
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 581
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The transmission is in (P.
• The power mode is in ON.
■
TPMS Calibration
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
, parking brake and brake system and safety
support indicators may come on in amber along with
a message in the gauge when you set the power
mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
1TPMS Calibration
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed.
The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-
60 mph (48-97 km/h).
During this period, if the power mode is set to ON
and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
If the tire chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 439 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
440
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
When you calibrate the TPMS, do the
following.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
1. Press the (home) button, to select
Settings, then press the left selector wheel.
u Vehicle settings appears on the display.
2. Roll the left selector wheel.
u TPMS calibration appears on the
display.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 440 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
441
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Continued
Driving
3. Press the left selector wheel.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
4. Roll the left selector wheel and select
Calibrate, then press the left selector
wheel.
u Calibration started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
• If the Calibration failed to start message
appears, repeat step 4.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 441 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
442
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
When you calibrate the TPMS, do the
following.
2 Customized Features P. 345
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the button.
3. Select Vehicle Settings.
4. Select TPMS Calibration.
5. Select Calibrate or Cancel.
• If the Calibration Failed To Start.
message appears, repeat step 5.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 442 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
443
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 443 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
444
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 444 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
445
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
Continued
Driving
Blind Spot Information System
*
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.
The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h)
or above.
Alert zone range
A: Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side.
B: Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper.
C: Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the
approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)
The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven
on straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand
the alert zone (alert zone 1 and 2).
■
How the System works
1Blind Spot Information System
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the Blind Spot Information
System has limitations. Always look in your mirrors,
to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for
other vehicles before changing lanes. Overreliance on
the Blind Spot Information System may result in a
collision.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer in the
following situations:
• The rear bumper or area around the radar sensors
is strongly impacted.
• The indicator does not come on even if a vehicle in
the alert zone should have been detected.
• The rear bumper or any system components need
to be repaired.
If the rear bumper or any system components are
repaired, the system will revert to alert zone 1 only
until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1
and 2.
Radar Sensors: underneath the
rear bumper corners
: Alert zone 1
A
BC
: Alert zone 2
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 445 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
446
Driving
■
When the system detects a vehicle
Blind Spot Information System alert indicator:
Located on the outside rearview mirror on
both sides.
Comes on when:
• A vehicle approaches you from behind to
overtake you at a speed difference of no
more than about 31 mph (50 km/h).
• You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of
no more than about 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You use the turn signal lever to signal a turn in
the direction of the detected vehicle while the
Blind Spot Information System alert indicator
is on.
u The beeper sounds three times.
1Blind Spot Information System
*
For proper Blind Spot Information System operation:
• Always keep the rear bumper and area around the
radar sensors clean.
• Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur:
• The Blind Spot Information System alert indicator
does not come on and the message Blind spot
information system not available appears on
the driver information interface.
• The Blind Spot Information System alert indicator
may come on even with the message displayed.
Comes On
Blinks
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 446 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
447
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 107
2 Safety Support P. 118
The Blind Spot Information System will stay on the previously selected on (checked)
or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.
■
Blind Spot Information System On and Off
1Blind Spot Information System
*
You can change the settings for the Blind Spot
Information System.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 447 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
448
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
Driving
The Blind Spot Information System alert indicator may not come on under the
following conditions:
• There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the
adjacent lane.
• A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
• An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
• The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The Blind Spot Information System may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Making a turn at an intersection.
• Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.
• An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle, is in the alert
zone.
• Driving on a curved road.
• A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
• The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another
vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is covered by dirt, mud,
snow, ice, etc.
• The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or
deformed.
• In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog).
• Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle.
• An object such as a bicycle rack is attached to the rear of the vehicle.
■
Blind Spot Information System Conditions and Limitations
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 448 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
449
Continued
Driving
Honda Sensing®
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers,
and the front grille, and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of
the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide
view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview
mirror.
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Models without Low Speed Braking Control
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 449 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
450
uuHonda Sensing® u
Driving
Honda Sensing® has the following functions.
■
The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) 2 P. 453
• Low Speed Braking Control
*
2 P. 465
• Road Departure Mitigation System 2 P. 511
• Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 519
■
The functions which require switch operations to activate
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
2 P. 471
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 491
• Traffic Jam Assist
*
2 P. 502
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 450 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
451
uuHonda Sensing® u
Continued
Driving
■
Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with
Low Speed Follow.
Or press to cancel the system.
■
LKAS Button
Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and
Traffic Jam Assist
*
.
Or press to cancel these systems.
■
CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.
■
Interval Button
Press to change the ACC with Low Speed
Follow following-interval.
■
RES/+/SET/− Switch
Press the RES/+/SET/− switch up to set or
resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or
increase the vehicle speed. Press the RES/+/
SET/− switch down to set the ACC with Low
Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.
■
Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist
*
Interval Button
Button
LKAS Button
CANCEL Button
RES/+/SET/− Switch
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 451 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
452
uuHonda Sensing® u
Driving
You can see the current state of Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow,
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) and Traffic
Jam Assist
*
.
a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow
is ready to be activated.
• Green: The system is on.
• White: The system is standby.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
b Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist
*
is
ready to be activated.
• Green: The system is on.
• White: The system is standby.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
c Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist
*
is
activated and whether or not traffic lane
lines are detected.
• Green lines: The system is on.
• White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected.
• Amber line: Lane departure is detected.
d Indicates whether or not a vehicle is
detected ahead.
e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow
shows the set vehicle speed.
f
Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow
shows the set vehicle interval.
■
Gauge Content
6
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 452 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
453
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle
colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming
vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle).
The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined,
as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision
severity.
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS
TM
is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions
nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBS
TM
may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 458
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
When the CMBS
TM
is activated, it will continue to
operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially
depressed. However, it will be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 453 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
454
Driving
■
How the system works
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle
in front of you.
The CMBS
TM
activates when:
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving
bicycle detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a
chance of a collision.
• Your vehicle drives at about 18 mph (30 km/h) or less and there is a chance of in
frontal collision with a detected oncoming vehicle when you turn left at an
intersection.
• Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines
there is a chance of a collision with:
- An oncoming or stationary vehicle detected in front of you.
- A pedestrian or moving bicycle detected in front of you.
1How the system works
The camera in the CMBS
TM
is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 458
A front wide view camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.
When to use
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 454 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
455
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
The CMBS
TM
will be canceled when your vehicle stops or the system determines
there no longer is the potential for a collision.
The CMBS
TM
may also be canceled when a driver operates the steering wheel and
the brake or accelerator pedal to avoid a collision.
■
When the system activates
The system provides visual and audible alerts
of a possible collision, and stops if the collision
is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a
collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.)
You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the
system’s earliest collision alert will come on.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
Visual Alerts
Beep
Audible Alert
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 455 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
456
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS
TM
may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBS
TM
The sensors detect a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a collision with the
vehicle ahead of you.
When in Long, visual and audible
alerts come on at a longer distance
from a vehicle ahead than in Normal
setting, and in Short, at a shorter
distance than in Normal.
—
Stage
two
The risk of a collision has increased,
time to respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts.
Lightly applied
Stage
three
The CMBS
TM
determines that a collision
is unavoidable.
Forcefully applied
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 456 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
457
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 107
2 Safety Support P. 118
The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off
the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
CMBS
TM
On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
You cannot turn the CMBS
TM
off while driving.
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut off, and the
safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay
on under certain conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 458
The CMBS
TM
is not activated for about 15 seconds
after the engine starts.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
, low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
, parking brake and brake system and safety
support indicators may come on in amber along with
a message in the gauge when you set the power
mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 457 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
458
Driving
The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will
come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed
below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBS
TM
functions.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto vehicles, pedestrians, moving bicycles, or road
surfaces.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles may not be illuminated).
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
• Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
1CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 458 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
459
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• Tire chains are installed.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The suspension has been modified.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 459 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
460
Driving
■
Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the camera due to the condition of
the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming
vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle ahead of you is too short.
• The vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle
suddenly cuts in front of or jumps out in front of you.
• The bicycle is stopped.
• The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.
• When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle
blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing them.
• When several pedestrians or bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group.
• When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly.
• A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction.
• The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side
or not lit on either side in a dark place.
• When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by load.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or they
are running.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When the pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Make sure that all the tires are of the same specified
size, type and brand, and that they are evenly worn.
If you use tires of different sizes, types, brands, or
degree of wear, the system may not work properly.
Do not modify the suspension. Altering the height of
the vehicle may prevent the system from working
properly.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 460 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
461
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
■
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a small motorcycle, motorcycle with a sidecar,
wheelchair, or other specially shaped vehicle.
• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
• When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle
is not in front of the vehicle.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you,
oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle is significantly large.
• When the vehicle or moving bicycle in front of you slows suddenly.
• When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision.
• When you approach the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrians or
moving bicycles while accelerating rapidly or operating the steering wheel (except
when turning left at an intersection etc.)
*1
• When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or
other bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you,
oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle.
• When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
*1: When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning
left, the CMBS
TM
is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the
steering wheel.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 461 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
462
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■
Automatic shutoff
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator
(amber) comes and stays on when:
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.).
Once the conditions that caused the CMBS
TM
to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 462 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
463
uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBS
TM
may activate under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right
turn.
• Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to
pass.
• Your vehicle approaches another vehicle at an intersection, etc.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 463 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
464
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
• When passing through a low or narrow gate at a speed well over the speed limit.
• When there are traffic signs or structures such as guard rails are beside the road
along a curve.
• When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
• When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 464 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
465
uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Continued
Driving
Low Speed Braking Control
*
Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, this
system can detect if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other
obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too
much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage
from impact through assistive braking and/or assistive driving power suppression.
1Low Speed Braking Control
*
If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a
situation where you do not want automatic brake
application (such as when the vehicle is between two
railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal
to deactivate the system and then continue to drive
as intended.
3
WARNING
The Low Speed Braking Control System
cannot avoid all collisions and may not
reduce damage in each situation where the
accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively
pressed. Overreliance on the system may
result in a collision with serious injury or
death. Always check your surroundings,
your shift position, and your pedal use.
Driver remains responsible for safely
operating the vehicle.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 465 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control
*
466
Driving
■
Assistive braking
Assistive braking provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving
between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of
a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance
with braking.
■
How the System Works
1Low Speed Braking Control
*
For directions on the proper handling of the sonar
sensors, please refer to the following page.
2 Sonar Sensors
*
P. 527
The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a
few seconds after the system is activated. To keep the
vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or
put the transmission into
(P.
In order to prevent the system from activating when
not needed, always turn it off during vehicle
maintenance, when loading on ships, trucks, and so
on, or when using a chassis dynamometer, free
rollers for inspection or when washing the car in
conveyor type car wash machine.
Audible Alert
Beep Beep
The vehicle
applies brake
Driver
depresses
brake pedal
Remove
brake after
maintaining
stationary
position
Stop
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 466 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
467
uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Continued
Driving
■
Assistive driving power suppression
When the vehicle is stopped or moving at less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and there is an
obstacle such as a wall detected near the front of or back of the vehicle, if the
accelerator pedal is depressed more than necessary, the system will inform you with
a visual and audible alert. At the same time, the system will prevent sudden forward
or backwards movement by limiting the output of the engine, then assistive braking
will activate when you get closer to the obstacle.
Assistive driving power suppression will not activate in the following situations.
When moving forward:
When on a steep slope or the shift position is in
(P, (R, or (N.
When reversing:
When on a steep slope or the shift position is in a position other than
(R.
Audible Alert
Beep
Beep
Accidental depression of
the accelerator/Limiting
the output of the engine
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 467 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control
*
468
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 107
2 Safety Support P. 118
The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the
last time you drove the vehicle.
■
System On and Off
1System On and Off
The system may temporarily turn off after
reconnecting the battery.
The system will automatically turn ON after the
vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h)
for some time.
If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 468 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
469
uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Driving
Conditions for assistive driving power suppression.
• When the accelerator is no longer depressed.
• When the accelerator is depressed for approximately four seconds.
• When the brake pedal is depressed.
Conditions for assistive braking cancellation.
• A certain amount of time has passed since activation.
The system may not operate correctly in the following conditions:
■
Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect
• Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth,
sponges, etc.
• Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc.
• Short or small obstacles.
• Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper.
• Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road.
• Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.
■
Conditions for Cancellation
■
Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations
1Conditions for Cancellation
After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once,
it will not activate again for the same obstacle.
They can be activated again after driving for a certain
distance after last activation.
Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when
moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it
activates when moving forward, it can be activated
again immediately if reversing.)
However, if assistive braking has been activated, in
order to activate assistive driving power suppression
again, it is necessary to drive for a certain distance to
reset the system.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 469 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
470
uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Driving
■
Examples of situations where the sonar sensor cannot detect obstacles
• The sonar sensor is dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.).
• The vehicle is too hot or cold.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.
■
Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc.
• The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low.
• When going down a very steep slope.
• When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit
ultrasonic waves.
■
Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision
• When passing through short or narrow gates.
• When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps.
• When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position.
• When there are obstacles next to the road.
• When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc.
• When driving on flooded roads.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 470 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
471
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your
vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.
• Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead
within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow
operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC
with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
• Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In
(D or (S.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed
Follow can lead to a crash.
Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only
when driving on expressways or freeways
and in good road and weather conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited
braking capability and may not stop your
vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a
vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal if the conditions require.
When to use
A front wide view camera is
located behind the rearview
mirror.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 471 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
472
Driving
■
How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low
Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever
necessary, and always keep a safe interval between
your vehicle and other vehicles.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly
under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions
and Limitations P. 479
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn
off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.
3
WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with Low Speed Follow
system is operating can result in the
vehicle moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
How to use
■
Press the button on the
steering wheel.
(white) is on in the gauge
ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 472 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
473
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the
pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when you reach the desired
speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low
Speed Follow begins.
When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving
and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to
about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is
stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the
following conditions:
• On roads with frequent lane change or continuous
stop and go traffic, ACC with Low Speed Follow
cannot keep an appropriate distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
• On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.),
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not detect the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you properly.
• On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels
may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control
on the condition.
• On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.
• On roads with undulating slopes.
On when ACC with Low
Speed Follow begins
Up or down
RES/+/SET/− Switch
(green)
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
, parking brake and brake system and safety
support indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the gauge when you set the power mode
to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 473 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
474
Driving
When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts
operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and
set speed appear on the gauge.
When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow,
Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric
Power Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to
automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for
you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
audio/information screen
*
between mph and km/h.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122
2 Customized Features P. 345
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Interval
(green)
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 474 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
475
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
■
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with
Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed
Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the
vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 484
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds,
a message appears on the driver information
interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 475 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
476
Driving
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed
Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the
following circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with
Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect
beep on and off can be selected.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not
work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions
and Limitations P. 479
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 476 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
477
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
■
There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow
accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and
then maintains it.
On steep downhill during ACC with Low
Speed Follow, it brakes to inhibit excessive
acceleration for maintaining the set speed.
However, the vehicle speed may become
faster than the set speed.
■
When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the
accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the
following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow
range.
1When in Operation
• ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily
control the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your
vehicle depending on the road conditions (e.g.
curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g. operating the
steering wheel or the vehicle location in the lane).
• When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such
as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC
with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain
the set following-interval for a short time.
A vehicle icon with line contour
appears on the gauge.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 477 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
478
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
■
A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and
slows to a stop
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the gauge.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,
the vehicle icon on the gauge blinks. If you
press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, or
depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low
Speed Follow operates again within the prior
set speed.
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you
resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal
and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate
again within the prior set speed.
(green)
(green)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 478 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
479
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Continued
Driving
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of
these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC
with Low Speed Follow functions.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
the whole vehicle may not be illuminated).
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
■
ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 479 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
480
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
• Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
• Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
Vehicle conditions
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• Tire chains are installed.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The suspension has been modified.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 480 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
481
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Continued
Driving
■
Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect
the vehicle ahead of you
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it.
• The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either
side in a dark place.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 481 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
482
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
■
Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly
• A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large.
• When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a specially-shaped vehicle.
• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane.
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle.
• When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.
Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 482 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
483
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/− switch on the steering
wheel.
• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is
increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed
increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed
Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to
maintain the set interval between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
press down and release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the
current speed of the vehicle is set.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 483 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
484
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
Press the Interval button to change the ACC
with Low Speed Follow following-interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest,
far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.
Determine the most appropriate following-
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following-interval
Interval Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 484 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
485
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Continued
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far or
furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has
stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low
Speed Follow interval setting.
Following-interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Nearest
82.7 feet
25.2 meters
1.1 sec
107.1 feet
32.6 meters
1.1 sec
Mid
113.4 feet
34.6 meters
1.6 sec
147.2 feet
44.9 meters
1.6 sec
Far
144.2 feet
44.0 meters
2.0 sec
187.3 feet
57.1 meters
2.0 sec
Furthest
175.9 feet
53.6 meters
2.4 sec
229.6 feet
70.0 meters
2.4 sec
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 485 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
486
Driving
To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any
of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
• Press the button.
u indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is
moving forward.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can
activate the ACC with Low Speed Follow with the
prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up even if the
vehicle is stopped.
When you turn the ACC with Low Speed Follow off
by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the
brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the
gauge in gray.
When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the ACC
with Low Speed Follow is activated with displayed
speed.
If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press
the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in
gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your
vehicle's current speed.
CANCEL Button
Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 486 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
487
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
■
Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may
cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA®, CMBS
TM
, or Low Speed Braking Control
*
is activated.
• When the VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too
close to your vehicle.
• When accelerating rapidly.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel.
• When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for
example, you are descending a long slope).
• When the system doesn't detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain
amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the
following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The engine is turned off.
1To Cancel
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the
button. Press the button to activate the
system, then set the desired speed.
(white)
Prior Set Speed (gray)
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 487 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
488
Driving
Press and hold the Interval button for one
second. Cruise mode selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
The indicator comes on.
• Green: The system is on.
• White: The system is standby.
To switch back to ACC with Low Speed
Follow, press and hold the Interval button
again for one second.
■
When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when
you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power
Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
■
To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
You cannot switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to
Cruise Control in the following situations:
• When the vehicle speed is set.
• When ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
audio/information screen
*
between mph and km/h.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122
2 Customized Features P. 345
ACC with
Low Speed
Follow ON
Cruise
Control ON
Interval
Button
(white) (white)
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 488 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
489
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving
• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is
increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed
increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
• Press the button.
u The indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled
cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with
the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while driving at a
speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the
CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the
prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.
When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the
cruise control is activated with displayed speed.
If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press
the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in
gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your
vehicle's current speed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 489 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
490
Driving
1To Cancel
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When cruise control is canceled by pressing the
button.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 490 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
491
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
■
Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to
either of the lane lines.
■
Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an
autonomous driving system and always requires
driver attention and control. The system does not
work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or
fail to steer the vehicle.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on
expressways or freeways.
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 498
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
■
Front Wide View Camera
Monitors the lane lines
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 491 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
492
Driving
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts
activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
■
Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the
system will recover automatically.
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
sharp curves.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 492 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
493
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
LKAS indicator (green)
Amber line
Warning Area
Warn
ing Area
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 493 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
494
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
■
How to activate the system
1. Press the LKAS button.
u LKAS indicator (white) appears on the
gauge.
The system is standby.
u If traffic lane lines are detected, white
lines appear on the gauge.
■
When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Be sure to keep the following below to activate the
system properly;
• Always keep the windshield around the camera
clean.
• When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
• Do not attach a sticker to the area around the
camera.
If LKAS button is pressed when the system can be
used, LKAS is on without standby.
White lines
LKAS indicator
(white)
LKAS
Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 494 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
495
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
2. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The LKAS indicator changes from white
to green, and white lines change to
green once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
Press the LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
LKAS indicator (green)
Green lines
■
To Cancel
LKAS Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 495 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
496
Driving
■
The system operation is suspended if
you:
• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph
(64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about
45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
• Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left
of the lane.
1To Cancel
You can change the setting for the LKAS.
LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
When the LKAS is suspended,
green lines on the gauge change
to white lines or disappear, and
the beeper sounds (if activated).
LKAS indicator (white)
White lines
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 496 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
497
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
■
The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is turned quickly.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 94 mph (150 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
■
The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:
In the following cases, traffic lane lines may disappear on the gauge, the beeper may
sound, and the LKAS may automatically be canceled:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA® system engages.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 497 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
498
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■
Environmental conditions
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and
lane lines and the road surface are not visible.
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
■
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 498 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
499
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk.
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 499 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
500
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• Driving on roads with double lane lines.
• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
• Passing through an exit or an interchange.
Lane void of lines at exit or
interchange
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 500 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
501
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Tire chains are installed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 501 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
502
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
Traffic Jam Assist
*
The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the
windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.
Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your
vehicle in the center of the detected lane.
■
How Traffic Jam Assist works
When you are in heavy traffic and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active, the
Traffic Jam Assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering
torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.
When you use the turn signal to indicate a lane change, Traffic Jam Assist is
temporarily deactivated. It is reactivated once the vehicle is traveling in the center of
the lane and the system has detected the traffic lane lines.
When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is
temporarily canceled.
The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full
control of the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.
1Traffic Jam Assist
*
Important Safety Reminders
Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is
not an autonomous driving system and always
requires driver attention and control. The system
does not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on
expressways or freeways.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
The Traffic Jam Assist only alerts you when lane drift
is detected without a turn signal in use. The Traffic
Jam Assist may not detect all lane markings or lane
departures; accuracy will vary based on weather,
speed, and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
Traffic Jam Assist may not work properly under
certain conditions:
2 Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and
Limitations P. 507
Front Wide View Camera
Detects left and right white
(or yellow) traffic lane line
s
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 502 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
503
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Continued
Driving
When the vehicle enters the warning area, Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with an
audible alert as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
LKAS indicator (green)
Amber line
Warning Area
Wa
rni
ng Area
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 503 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
504
Driving
Traffic Jam Assist is activated when all of the following conditions exist:
• LKAS is activated.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45 mph (0 and 72 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The driver is gripping the steering wheel.
• The shift position is in
(D, (S or (L.
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations:
• You are traveling on a road with sharp curves.
u The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited for
the road conditions.
• You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area.
• You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with snow.
u The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.
■
Traffic Jam Assist Activation
1Traffic Jam Assist Activation
Refer to the following page for proper handling of
the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS):
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 491
Refer to the following page for steering buttons and
displays:
2 Operation Switches for the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist
*
P. 451
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 504 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
505
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane
while driving.
u The LKAS indicator changes from white
to green, and white lines change to
green once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
■
How Traffic Jam Assist Works
1How Traffic Jam Assist Works
If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of
the white (or yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic
Jam Assist is active, deactivate Traffic Jam Assist and
have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
In some cases the system cannot properly detect the
traffic lane lines and, as a result, will not provide
steering assistance.
2 Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and
Limitations P. 507
If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel
or does not adequately maintain control of steering,
the warning below will appear.
If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after the
warning above has repeatedly appeared, a warning
buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist will be
canceled.
Green lines
LKAS indicator (green)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 505 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
506
Driving
Press the LKAS button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.
■
Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
The system is automatically temporarily canceled under the following circumstances.
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• You are driving through a sharp curve.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.
■
Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically canceled when:
The traffic lane lines will disappear from the screen, the beeper may sound, and
Traffic Jam Assist will be canceled under the following circumstances:
• The temperature of the camera is too high.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, is dirty.
■
Canceling Traffic Jam Assist
1Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
You are traveling over 45 mph (72 km/h).
uWhen the speed of the vehicle reaches 45 mph
(72 km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is deactivated and
LKAS is activated instead. Once the speed of the
vehicle drops to under 40 mph (64 km/h), Traffic
Jam Assist is reactivated.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 506 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
507
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Continued
Driving
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■
Environmental conditions
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).
• When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to
the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection.
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
■
Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 507 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
508
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk.
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 508 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
509
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Continued
Driving
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• Driving on roads with double lane lines.
• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
• Passing through an exit or an interchange.
Lane void of lines at exit or
interchange
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 509 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
510
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Tire chains are installed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 510 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
511
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Continued
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation System
Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle
crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the
pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.
The front wide view camera behind the
rearview mirror monitors left and right lane
markings in white or yellow, the outer edge of
the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or
a detected oncoming vehicles.
If your vehicle approaches any detected lane
markings, the outer edge of the pavement
(bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected
oncoming vehicles when the turn signals have
not been engaged, the system activates.
u If the system cannot detect lane markings
(in white or yellow), no assistance will be
provided to avoid approaching oncoming
vehicles. In addition to a visual alert, the
system assists with steering and alerts you
with rapid steering wheel vibrations to
help you remain within the detected lane.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
As a visual alert, the Lane departure
message appears on the driver information
interface.
■
How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation System
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure
Mitigation system has limitations.
Overreliance on the Road Departure Mitigation system
may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to
keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
The Road Departure Mitigation system alerts you
when the system detects that you are approaching
the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel
border), an oncoming vehicle, or drifting into another
lane without using a turn signal.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect
all lane markings or every instance of lane drift.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not
detect that you are approaching the outer edge of
the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or an
oncoming vehicle.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not be
able to assist you depending on weather, speed or
road conditions.
The Road Departure Mitigation system is not activated
for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not work
properly or may work improperly under the certain
conditions:
2 Road Departure Mitigation system
Conditions and Limitations P. 515
Amber line
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 511 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
512
Driving
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the
pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
1Road Departure Mitigation System
There are times when you may not notice the Road
Departure Mitigation system functions due to your
operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.
You can change the settings for the Road Departure
Mitigation system.
If LKAS is off, the message below may appear if the
system has determined that there is a possibility of
your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings,
the outer edge of the pavement (into a grass or
gravel border) or oncoming vehicle.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 512 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
513
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
The system activates when all of the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking, or steering.
■
How the System Activates
1How the System Activates
The Road Departure Mitigation system may
automatically shut off and the safety support
indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 86
The Road Departure Mitigation system function can
be impacted when the vehicle is:
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 513 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
514
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 107
2 Safety Support P. 118
The Road Departure Mitigation system is in the previously selected on (checked) or
off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.
■
Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off
1Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off
When you have selected Warning only from the
customized options using the driver information
interface
*
or audio/information screen
*
, the system
does not operate the steering wheel.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
, parking brake and brake system and safety
support indicators may come on in amber along with
a message in the gauge when you set the power
mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 514 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
515
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Continued
Driving
The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer
edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■
Environmental conditions
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines, the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated).
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and
lane lines and the road surface are not visible.
• The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass
or gravel.
■
Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 515 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
516
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk.
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• Driving on roads with double lane lines.
• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
• Passing through an exit or an interchange.
• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 516 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
517
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Continued
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• Tire chains are installed.
• The suspension has been modified.
■
Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming
vehicles
• The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.
• The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you.
• When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it.
• The headlights of an oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side
in a dark place.
• The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short.
• Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you.
• There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes.
• The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 517 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
518
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
■
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
• When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions.
• When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 518 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
519
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Continued
Driving
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle
has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while
driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your
vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined
time and distance.
If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will
not be displayed.
The sign icon also may switch to another one, or disappear when:
• The end of speed limit or other designated limit is detected.
• You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.
■
How the System Works
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted
on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does
not work on the designated traffic signs of all the
countries you travel, nor in all situations.
Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at
speeds appropriate for the road conditions.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the camera’s field of
vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may
also cause the system to operate abnormally. After
replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the
camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary
for the system to operate properly.
The traffic sign recognition system is not activated for
about 15 seconds after the engine starts.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 525
You can turn the traffic sign recognition system on
and off.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 519 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
520
Driving
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system
to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face
the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use
a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
If your vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit, an
icon representing the speed limit sign for the current
area will blink in the display.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Customized Features P. 345
The system’s ability to accurately notify the driver of
the speed limit is dependent on certain conditions
such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well
as the speed and direction of travel of the vehicle. In
some cases, the system may display false warnings or
other inaccurate information.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions
and Limitations P. 521
The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from
country to country. Just after entering a country
whose unit differs to the one of the country from
which you came, Traffic Sign Recognition System
may not work correctly.
2 Settings
*
P. 123
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 122
2 Customized Features P. 345
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 520 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
521
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize a traffic sign in the
following cases.
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
■
Roadway conditions
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Tire chains are installed.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
■
Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
When the traffic sign recognition system
malfunctions, appears on the gauge. If this
message does not disappear, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 521 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
522
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
■
The position or the condition of the traffic sign
• The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find.
• The sign is located far away from your vehicle.
• The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach.
• The sign is on a corner or bend in the road.
• The sign is faded or bent.
• The sign is rotated or damaged signs.
• The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.
• Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other
object.
• Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden
in shadow.
• The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs).
• Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.).
■
Other conditions
• When you are driving at a high speed.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 522 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
523
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Continued
Driving
The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying
signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at
all in the following cases.
u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed
limit.
• There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,
vehicle type, school zone, etc.
• Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are
blurred, etc.).
• The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for
the lane, such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between
the side road and the main road.
• There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar
sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 523 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
524
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the screen.
■
Signs Displayed on the Gauge
Speed Limit Sign
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 524 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
525
uuHonda Sensing®uFront Wide View Camera
Continued
Driving
Front Wide View Camera
The camera, used in systems such as Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), Road
Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow, Traffic Sign Recognition system, CMBS
TM
, and Traffic Jam Assist
*
, is designed
to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
■
Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Wide View Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Wide
View Camera
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 525 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuHonda Sensing® uFront Wide View Camera
526
Driving
1Front Wide View Camera
If the Some driver assist systems cannot
operate: Camera temperature too high message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot
operate: Clean front windshield or poor viewing
condition. message appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the
windshield is clean.
Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message
does not disappear after driven for a while, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 526 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
527
uuHonda Sensing® uSonar Sensors
*
Driving
Sonar Sensors
*
■
Location and range of sensors
The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille.
1Sonar Sensors
*
For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not:
• Place stickers or other objects on or around the
sensors.
• Hit the area around the sensors.
• Attempt to take apart any sensor.
• Put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Consult with a dealer if:
• A sensor has been subjected to shock.
• Work needs to be done to the area around a
sensor.
In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not
work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• The front or rear bumper has made contact with a
hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc.
• The vehicle has been involved in frontal or rear
collision.
• The vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle.
Sonar Sensors Sonar Sensors
Sensor Range
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 527 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
528
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
■
To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the power mode is in.
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The indicator in the switch comes on.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on.
■
To release
The power mode must be in ON in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The indicator in the switch goes off.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.
Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.
■
Parking Brake
1Brake System
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a
whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is
because the brake system is in operation, and it is
normal.
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
1Parking Brake
You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating from the rear wheel area when you apply
or release the parking brake. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 617
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the brakes on all four
wheels are applied by the VSA® system until the
vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking
brake then applies, and the switch should be
released.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 528 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
529
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■
Automatic parking brake feature operation
If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:
• The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.
• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake
system indicator (red) is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 530
■
To release automatically
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle
facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
When on a hill, it may require more
accelerator input to release.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.
You can release the parking brake
automatically when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
• The transmission is not in
(P or (N.
1Parking Brake
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
• When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with
Low Speed Follow.
• When the power system is turned off while ACC
with Low Speed Follow is activated.
• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system
is applied.
• When the engine is turned off while the brake hold
is applied.
• When there is a problem with the Brake Hold
System while brake hold is applied.
If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator
pedal may need to be pressed farther to
automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Malfunction indicator lamp
• Transmission system indicator
Accelerator Pedal
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 529 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBrakinguBrake System
530
Driving
■
Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake
switch.
u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.
3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping
sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.
4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the
switch.
u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated.
u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.
u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and
brake system indicator (red) is on.
If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through
a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below.
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the
electric parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.
u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow and the automatic
brake hold system.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and
brake system indicator (red) is on.
1Parking Brake
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Parking brake and brake system indicator
• VSA® system indicator
• ABS indicator
• Supplemental restraint system indicator
The parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving with the electric parking brake switch being
pulled.
In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in
place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and
make sure the automatic parking brake feature is
deactivated.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-
type car wash or when having your vehicle towed,
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and
leave the parking brake released.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 530 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
531
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 536
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 535
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower speed position.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Whenever the brakes are activated by CMBS
TM
or
another system that automatically controls braking,
the brake pedal is depressed and released in
accordance with braking function.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 531 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBrakinguBrake System
532
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
■
Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the
engine. Press the automatic brake hold
button.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator comes on. The system is turned
on.
The system is in the previously selected on or
off setting each time you fasten the driver’s
seat belt and start the engine.
■
Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal to come to a
complete stop. The transmission must not be
in
(P or(R.
u The automatic brake hold indicator
comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10
minutes.
u Release the brake pedal after the
automatic brake hold indicator comes
on.
■
Automatic Brake Hold
1Automatic Brake Hold
3
WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
3
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in
(P and applying the parking
brake.
Comes
On
Automatic Brake Hold Button
On
Brake Pedal
Comes
On
Comes
On
U.S.
Canada
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 532 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
533
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■
Canceling the system
Depress the accelerator pedal while the
transmission is in a position other than
(P or
(N. The system is canceled and the vehicle
starts to move.
u The automatic brake hold indicator goes
off. The system continues to be on.
■
The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.
• You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into
(P or (R.
■
The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The engine is turned off.
• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 537
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation.
3
WARNING
When using the automatic brake hold,
keep your foot on the brake pedal until the
automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
If the vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Release your foot from the brake pedal
after the automatic brake hold indicator
comes on.
On
Accelerator Pedal
Goes
Off
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 533 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuBrakinguBrake System
534
Driving
■
Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Only the automatic brake hold system
indicator comes on:
• Press the automatic brake hold button.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
When the automatic brake hold indicator
comes on at the same time:
• Press the automatic brake hold button with
the brake pedal depressed.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator and the automatic brake hold
indicator go off.
1Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
If you turn off the engine or unfasten the driver’s seat
belt while the automatic brake hold system is on, the
automatic brake hold system will automatically turn
off. In this case, when the driver’s seat belt is
fastened and the engine is restarted, the automatic
brake hold system will turn on without needing to
press the automatic brake hold button.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
Goes
Off
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 534 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
535
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■
ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake
pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to
press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel
the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
• Wet or snow covered roads.
• Roads paved with stone.
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
the incorrect size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking will not be affected, there is a
possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
• You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
• The tires are equipped with snow chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
• Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
engine has been started and while the vehicle
accelerates.
• Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 535 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
536
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■
Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 536 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
537
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Change the shift position to
(P.
4. Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30
seconds.
Always set the parking brake, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1When Stopped
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
until you have confirmed that
(P is shown
on the shift position indicator.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 537 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
538
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
Parking Sensor System
*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the
approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■
The sensor location and range
1Parking Sensor System
*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
• The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or
dirt.
• The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
• There is something nearby that emits ultrasonic
waves or high frequency sounds.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The system may not detect these obstacles:
• Thin or low objects.
• Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
• Objects directly under the bumper.
The system may falsely detect obstacles in the
following situations:
• The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
• When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or
other objects that emit ultrasonic waves.
• There is splashing water near the sensors due to
heavy rains, etc.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors
Front Center Sensors
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Front: Within about 35 in (90 cm) or less
Rear: Within abou
t 40 in (100 cm) or less
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 538 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
539
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■
Parking sensor system on and off
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 107
2 Safety Support P. 118
The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle
when the transmission is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the
transmission is in any position other than
(P or (R, and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
1Parking Sensor System
*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will
be in the previously selected condition.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 539 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
540
Driving
■
Screen Operation
You can switch between split view off and
split view on by touching the split screen tab.
1Screen Operation
The split screen tab disappears, and the split view
returns to the last camera view mode under the
following conditions:
• If the parking sensor system is turned off.
• If there is a malfunction in the system.
Split Screen
Tab
Split View Off
Split View On
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 540 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
541
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
■
When the distance between your vehicle and detected obstacles becomes shorter
*1:On the driver information interface
*2:On the audio/information screen
*3:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
To temporarily turn off the beeper, press the left selector wheel while it is sounding. Temporary OFF will be canceled when the shift
position is switched or the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (14 km/h) or higher.
Interval
between
beeps
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator
Driver information
interface
Audio/Information Screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate
—
Front: About 35-24 in
(90-60 cm)
Rear: About 40-31 in
(100-80 cm)
Comes on
*1
/
Blinks
*2
in Yellow
*3
Short
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 32-25 in
(80-65 cm)
Comes on
*1
/
Blinks
*2
in Amber
Very short
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 25-16 in
(65-40 cm)
Continuous
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 16 in
(40 cm) or less
Comes on
*1
/
Blinks
*2
in Red
Indicators light up
where the sensor
detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 541 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
542
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides
the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors
are detecting obstacles at the closest range.
3
CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 542 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
543
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
The system activates when:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 544
• The transmission is in (R.
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
■
How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay
alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
an approaching vehicle under the following
conditions:
• An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
• A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
• The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
• When there is bad weather.
• Your vehicle is on an incline.
• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 543 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
544
Driving
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.
The system can be turned on and off on the
audio/information screen by pressing the
Cross Traffic Monitor icon.
You can also switch the system on and off
from the customized feature on the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 337, 345
■
When the System Detects a Vehicle
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber
when the transmission is in
(R, mud, snow or ice,
etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the
sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the
bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly
clean the area if necessary.
If the comes on when the transmission is in
(R,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission
in
(R, there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
■
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
Wide ViewNormal View
Arrow Icon
Top Down View
Cross Traffic Monitor
icon
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 544 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
545
Continued
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into
(R.
You can view three different camera modes on the rearview display.
■
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
The rear camera view is displayed prior to the audio/
information screen.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 337, 345
Fixed Guideline
ON: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into
(R.
OFF: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
ON: Guidelines move according to the steering
wheel direction.
OFF: Guidelines do not move.
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Camera
Tailgate open range
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 545 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
546
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Driving
• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view
mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide
view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put
the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took
the transmission out of (R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you
put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode and put the transmission back into (R
within 10 seconds after you took it out of (R, Top down view mode will be
activated.
Bumper Bumper Bumper
Wide view mode Normal view mode Top down view mode
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 546 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
547
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■
Fuel recommendation
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■
Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■
Fuel tank capacity: 14.0 US gal (53 L)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 547 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
548
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Unlock the driver’s door.
u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the
vehicle will unlock.
4. Press and release the area indicated by the
arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will
hear a click and the lid will open slightly.
5. Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully
open position.
1How to Refuel
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only
service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of
smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon
fuel for other uses) or other non-service station
devices can damage the area in and around the filler
opening.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flames away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Press
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 548 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
549
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
6. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always
add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L) of
fuel.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to
unlock the fuel fill door.
The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically
relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can
be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the
driver’s door.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the
specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction
indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 637
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 549 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
550
Driving
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO
2
emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
driver information interface.
• Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 565
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test.
For more information on how this test is performed,
please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for
“fuel consumption testing” in the search field at the
top of the page.
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter
Kilometers L per 100 km
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 550 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
551
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 552
Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 553
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 554
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 555
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 563
Opening the Hood ........................... 564
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 565
Oil Check......................................... 566
Adding Engine Oil............................ 567
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 568
Engine Coolant................................ 570
Transmission Fluid............................ 572
Brake Fluid....................................... 573
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 574
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 575
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
....577
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 581
Tire and Loading Information Label .. 583
Tire Labeling .................................... 583
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 585
Wear Indicators................................ 587
Tire Service Life................................ 587
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 588
Tire Rotation.................................... 589
Winter Tires ..................................... 590
Battery............................................... 592
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Remote Battery .......... 594
Climate Control System Maintenance .. 595
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 596
Exterior Care.................................... 598
Accessories and Modifications ........ 601
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 551 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
552
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■
Routine inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
2 Maintenance P. 28
■
Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake Fluid P. 573
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 575
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 577
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 559
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 650
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 552 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
553
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot
warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance.
Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■
Maintenance Safety
■
Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 553 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
554
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 554 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
555
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to
ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 555 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
556
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine
oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items
due soon.
■
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 559
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
(home) Button
Engine Oil Life
Main Item Sub Item
Left Selector Wheel
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 556 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
557
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information
Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
-
When you select the Maintenance
Minder screen, it displays codes for
maintenance items due at the next
engine oil change, along with the
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.
-
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6
percent.
Press the (home) button to switch
to another display.
The engine oil is approaching the end of
its service life, and the maintenance items
should be inspected and serviced soon.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 557 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
558
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder
message.
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1
percent.
Press the (home) button to switch
to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the
end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The engine oil life has passed its service
life, and a negative distance appears
after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display blinks.
Press the (home) button to switch
to another display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 558 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
559
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 559 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
560
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
1Maintenance Service Items
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
U.S. models
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes
●
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system
#
• Fuel lines and connections
#
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
6
●
Replace rear differential fluid
*
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*5
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 560 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
561
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
1Maintenance Service Items
• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.
Canadian models
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
0
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5
●
Replace engine coolant
6
●
Replace rear differential fluid
*
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*5
9
●
Service front and rear brakes
●
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system
#
• Fuel lines and connections
#
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 561 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
562
Maintenance
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen.
5. Press and hold the left selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset
mode.
6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item.
8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
Minder
TM
display yourself.
You can also reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 345
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 562 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
563
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 563 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
564
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center) to
the side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in
possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
3
WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot
due to heat from the engine.
To ensure against possible burns, do not
handle the metal section of the rod:
Use the foam grip instead.
Hood Release Handle
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 564 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
565
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and
viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive
the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.
■
Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil
• Honda Genuine Motor Oil
• API service SN or higher grade fuel-
efficient oil
• API Certification Mark “Starburst”
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
The following seal indicates the oil is energy
conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Ambient Temperature
0W-20
Ambient Temperature
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 565 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
566
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 566 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
567
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and
engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 567 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
568
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
counter-clockwise on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Under
Cover
Washer
Drain Bolt
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 568 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
569
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the
Engine oil pressure low warning appears, turn off
the engine, and check your work.
Oil Filter
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 569 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
570
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 570 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
571
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system. Do not push the cap down
when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
■
Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Radiator Cap
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 571 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
572
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid
yourself.
■
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle limited warranty.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 572 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
573
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Maintenance
Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
MIN
MAX
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 573 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
574
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by
looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the window washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the window
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid.
Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime
scale buildup.
Window Washer
Reservoir
U.S. models
Canadian models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 574 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
575
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlights
Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Front Turn Signal/Parking, Daytime Running and
Front Side Marker Lights
Front turn signal/parking, daytime running and front side marker lights are LED type.
Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
1Headlights
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming
readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 575 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
576
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and Rear Side Marker Lights
Maintenance
Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and
Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake lights, taillights, rear turn signal lights, and rear side marker lights are LED
type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Back-Up Lights and Taillights
Back-up lights and taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 576 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
577
Continued
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and
the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Front Wiper Blade
1. Set the power mode to ON, then to
VEHICLE OFF.
2. Within 10 seconds of setting the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper
switch in the MIST position for more than
two seconds.
u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.
3. Lift both wiper arms.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 577 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
578
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade
Maintenance
4. Depress the lock tab, then slide the wiper
blade off the wiper arm.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
6. Lower both wiper arms.
7. Set the power mode to ON, then set the
wiper switch to the MIST position once.
u The wiper arms return to the standard
position.
Tab
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 578 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
579
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Continued
Maintenance
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2. Pivot up the bottom end of the wiper blade
until it comes off from the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade out of the end with
the indent.
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
rear window.
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 579 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
580
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.
u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.
Retainers
Holder
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 580 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
581
Continued
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■
Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and
comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified
pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa,
0.1-0.2 kgf/cm
2
) per month.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 581 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uChecking Tires
582
Maintenance
■
Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 587
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 439
U.S. models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 582 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
583
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described as shown.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P215/55R17 94V
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 583 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uTire Labeling
584
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 584 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
585
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 585 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
586
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 586 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
587
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)
shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the
tread has worn so that the indicator is
exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 587 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
588
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 588 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
589
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information
interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■
Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■
Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 439
Front
Direction Mark
U.S. models
Front
Front
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 589 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
590
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 590 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
591
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain STD SC1038
Not recommended to use any type of chain or cable
Models with 215/60R17 tires
Models with 225/55R18 tires
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 591 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
592
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a
sensor located on the negative terminal of the
battery. If there is a problem with this sensor,
the driver information interface will display a
warning message. If this happens, have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 214
• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 134
•
The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 97
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
Canadian models only
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 592 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
593
uuBatteryuCharging the Battery
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, brake
system (amber), safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
indicators may come on in amber along with
a message in the driver information interface when
you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting
the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). Each indicator should go off. If any does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 593 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
594
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Remote Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the slot with key grip.
u Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent
scratching the keyless remote.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
3. Remove the battery by prying on the edge
with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to
replace the battery with the correct polarity.
u Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratching the keyless remote.
1Replacing the Remote Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
3
WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote
transmitter can cause severe internal burns
and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
the battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 594 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
595
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Climate Control System Maintenance
NOTICE
Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
evaporator with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood:
2 Safety Labels P. 84
2 Specifications P. 640
Canadian models
Caution
Flammable Refrigerant
Requires Registered
Technician to Service
Air Conditioning
System
:
:
:
:
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 595 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
596
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 596 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
597
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mats.
To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Floor Mats
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass
cleaner, on or around the cover of the front wide
view camera.
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position any rear seat floor mats properly. If not
properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with
the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
1Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 597 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
598
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
• Do not spray water directly onto the camera or the area around it. Water may
enter the lens and cause the camera to malfunction.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents.
It can cause a malfunction.
Lock the doors when washing the vehicle.
Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A
high-pressure spray may cause it to open.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the
fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel
system or engine.
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the
windshield, first set the wiper arms to the
maintenance position.
2 Changing the Front Wiper Blade P. 577
Air Intake Vents
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 598 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
599
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 599 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
600
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 600 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
601
Maintenance
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on the sides of the rear seats, on front or side pillars, or
near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 628
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 601 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
602
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Maintenance
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 602 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
603
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 604
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 605
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 612
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak ......... 614
Emergency Engine Start ................... 615
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 616
If the Battery Is Dead ....................... 617
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 619
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 620
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears .... 622
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On...623
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 623
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 624
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 625
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On .. 626
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 627
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 628
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 632
Emergency Towing........................... 634
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
... 635
If You Cannot Open the Tailgate .... 636
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container ... 637
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 603 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
605
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Put the transmission into
(P.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 605 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
606
Handling the Unexpected
1. Fold the cargo area floor lid into three parts.
2. Take the tool case out of the cargo area.
Take the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar
and jack out of the tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
■
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Changing a Flat Tire
NOTICE
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.
Floor Lid
Tool Case
Jack
Spare Tire
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 606 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
607
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 607 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
608
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 608 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Continued
609
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■
Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
Wheel
Nut
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 609 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
610
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench, jack
handle bar and jack back in the tool case.
Store the case in the cargo area under the
cargo floor lid.
■
Storing the Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Center Cap
For full-size
tire
For compact
spare tire
Wing Bolt
Spacer
Cone
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 610 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
611
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire
pressure monitor system problem will appear on the driver information interface
and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this
is normal and is no cause for concern.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 439
■
TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
U.S. models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 611 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
612
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 617
Depending on the situation, it may be possible to
temporarily start the engine using the emergency
start procedure.
2 Emergency Engine Start P. 615
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 612 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
613
uuEngine Does Not StartuChecking the Engine
Handling the Unexpected
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the driver information interface.
• If the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 614
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 632
Check the battery.
Have the battery checked by a dealer.
2 Battery P. 592
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with a
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 156
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 104
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 632
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 634
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 613 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
614
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To start, touch start button with emblem side of
remote message appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/
STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the keyless
remote while the ENGINE START/STOP
button is flashing. The buttons on the
keyless remote should be facing you.
u The ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes for about 30 seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds while the
ENGINE START/STOP button changes
from flashing to on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 614 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
615
uu
Engine Does Not Start
u
Emergency Engine Start
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Start
If the engine does not start using the normal engine starting procedure, you may be
able to start it using the emergency start procedure below.
Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency.
1. Check that the parking brake is engaged.
2. Check that the transmission is in
(P, then set the power mode to ACCESSORY.
3. Firmly depress the brake pedal and hold down the ENGINE START/STOP button
for at least 15 seconds.
This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to start the
engine using the above procedure.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1Emergency Engine Start
Refer to the following if you cannot move the shift
lever out of the
(P position.
2 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 619
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 615 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
616
uu
Engine Does Not Start
u
Emergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while
driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine
to be turned off.
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while
driving, the beeper sounds.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 616 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
617
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If the Battery Is Dead
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Open the cover on the positive + terminal.
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using the automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15-
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do
not connect this jumper cable to any other
part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting Procedure
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful
not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable
ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 617 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
618
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s stud bolt.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
1Jump Starting Procedure
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, brake
system (amber), safety support and low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
indicators may come on in amber along with
a message in the driver information interface when
you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting
the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 618 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
619
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
3. Remove the built-in key from the keyless
remote.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key in, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■
Releasing the Lock
Release
Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 619 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
620
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. appears
on the driver information interface.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■
First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then, open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with Engine temperature too
hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. on the
driver information interface may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 620 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
621
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected
■
Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once Engine temperature
too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to
cool. on the driver information interface
disappears.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■
Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the driver information
interface.
If Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. does not
appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 621 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
622
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears
■
Reasons for the warning to appear
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
■
What to do as soon as the warning
appears
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level
ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on.
■
What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three
minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 566
3. Start the engine and check the Engine oil
pressure low warning.
u The warning disappears: Start driving
again.
u The warning does not disappear within
10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 622 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
623
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■
What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 623 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
624
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■
Reasons for the indicator to blink
• There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
■
What to do when the indicator blinks
• Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a
dealer immediately.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator
come on simultaneously, the electronic brake
distribution system is not working. This can result in
vehicle instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
P. 626
U.S.
Canada
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 624 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
625
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on
• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
• If Do not drive displays on the driver information interface,
immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 625 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
626
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On
■
If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the
same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
release the parking brake manually or automatically
2 Parking Brake P. 528
•If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at
the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer
immediately.
u Preventing the vehicle from moving, put the transmission into
(P.
•If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able
to release it.
If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake
system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,
the parking brake is working.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work because it is
checking the system.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 626 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
627
uu
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator will either come on or
it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■
What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the
tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
U.S. models
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 627 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
628
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Fuse Box
Tab
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 628 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
629
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
■
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 BATTERY 125 A
2
- 40 A
- 40 A
F/BOX OPTION 60 A
- 40 A
F/BOX OPTION2 40 A
- (30 A)
F/BOX MAIN 60 A
3
- 30 A
- 30 A
- 70 A
RR DEFROSTER 30 A
- (40 A)
- 30 A
HTR MTR 40 A
4
- 30 A
ABS/VSA MTR 40 A
- (30 A)
- 30 A
IG MAIN 30 A
- 30 A
IG MAIN2 30 A
5
ST MAGNETIC SW 30 A
WIPER 30 A
EPS 70 A
- 30 A
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
MAIN FAN 30 A
F/BOX MAIN2 40 A
6 SUB FAN 30 A
7 BOOSTER MTR 40 A
8-(30 A)
9 - (20 A)
10 AUDIO SUB
*
(7.5 A)
11 FR DEICER
*
(15 A)
12 - -
13 H/STRG
*
(10 A)
14 - (10 A)
15 - (15 A)
16 MG CLUTCH 10 A
17 WASHER 15 A
18 HORN 10 A
19 BACK UP 15 A
20 AUDIO (15 A)
21 R/M1 20 A
22 DBW 15 A
23 R/M2 20 A
24 BACKUP FI-ECU 10 A
25 IGP 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
26 TCU 15 A
27 LCM L 20 A
28 - (20 A)
29 STOP 10 A
30 LCM R 20 A
31 IG COIL 15 A
32 - -
33 HAZARD 15 A
34 - -
35 - -
36 - -
37 - (30 A)
38 - -
39 - -
40 - (7.5 A)
41 IGPS [LAF] 10 A
42 IG1 MON2 10 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 629 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
630
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label under the steering column.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
■
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Box
Fuse Label
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 630 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
631
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
■
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 P/W DR 20 A
2 P/W AS 20 A
3 P/W RR R 20 A
4 P/W RR L 20 A
5 OPTION 10 A
6 SRS 10 A
7 T/G MTR (10 A)
8- -
9 - 20 A
10 DOOR LOCK 20 A
11 METER 10 A
12 ST CUT RLY 10 A
13 OPTION2 10 A
14 OPTION6 (VB SOL) 10 A
15 DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A)
16 SUNROOF
*
(20 A)
17 - -
18 - -
19 - -
20 - 10 A
21 CARGO ACC SOCKET 20 A
22 SMART 10 A
23 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A)
24 - -
25 IMG 10 A
26 SRS 10 A
27 ACG 10 A
28 ABS/VSA 10 A
29 FUEL PUMP 20 A
30 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
31 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
32 - -
33 USB CHG 10 A
34 - -
35 - -
36 - -
37 E-PT L 20 A
38 - -
39 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
40 P SEAT REC / RR HI
*
(20 A)
41 P SEAT SLIDE / FR HI
*
(20 A)
42 - -
43 A/C 10 A
44 DRL 10 A
45 ACC 10 A
46 ACC KEY LOCK 10 A
47 L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
48 H/SEAT
*
20 A
49 - -
50 - -
51 - -
52 E-DPS
*
(20 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
53 - -
54 OPTION1 / FUEL LID 10 A
55 - -
56 - -
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 631 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
632
uu
Fuses
u
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the main fuse in the engine
compartment fuse box.
u Look at the fuse through the hole.
u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and
confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 628
Replace a fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Hole
Main Fuse
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 632 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
633
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
4. Check the combined fuses in the engine
compartment fuse box.
u Look into the space between the fuses.
u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.
5. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with
the fuse puller and replace it with a new
one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 633 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
634
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■
Flatbed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■
Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flatbed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 528
2WD models
All models
2WD models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 634 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
635
Handling the Unexpected
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Push on the corner of the cover, then
remove the cover.
3. Pull the release cord as shown.
u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
4. Open the fuel fill door.
2 How to Refuel P. 548
■
What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
1What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Cover
Release Cord
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 635 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
636
Handling the Unexpected
If You Cannot Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.
1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the back of the tailgate.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while sliding the lever to the right with the
flat-tip screwdriver.
■
What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
1What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
Follow Up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.
Cover
Lever
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 636 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
637
Handling the Unexpected
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to
make it pop up slightly.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the cargo area.
2 Types of Tools P. 604
4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
NOTICE
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flames away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Funnel
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 637 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
638
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 638 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
This page intentionally left blank.
639
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 640
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 642
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 643
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 644
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 645
Warranty Coverages ........................ 647
Authorized Manuals......................... 650
Customer Service Information......... 651
Open Source License
Meter Open Source License ............. 652
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 639 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
640
Information
Specifications
■
Vehicle Specifications
■
Air Conditioning
Model HR-V
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity 15.3 – 17.1 oz (435 – 485 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL14 (POE)
Quantity 6.41 – 7.32 cu-in (105 – 120 cm
3
)
■
Engine Specifications
■
Fuel
■
Washer Fluid
Displacement 121.8 cu-in (1,996 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs
NGK
DILKAR7H11GS
DILKAR7G11GS
DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number
87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 14.0 US gal (53 L)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
■
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam) LED
Front Turn Signal/Parking/Daytime
Running Lights
LED
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Side Turn Signal Lights
*
(on Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake Lights LED
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Back-Up Lights LED
Taillights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights LED
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light LED
Interior Lights
Front and Rear Map
Lights
LED
Ambient Lights
*
LED
Vanity Mirror Light
*
1.4 W
Under Tray Light LED
Cargo Area Lights LED
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 640 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
641
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■
Brake Fluid
■
Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid
*1: 2WD
*2: AWD
■
Rear Differential Fluid
*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change
2.9 US qt (2.7 L)
*1
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
*2
Specified Honda DPSF-II
Capacity Change 1.318 US qt (1.247 L)
■
Engine Oil
■
Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20
·API service SN or higher grade 0W-20
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
Change
including
filter
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.57 US gal (5.93 L)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.65 L) in the reserve tank)
■
Tire
*1: Original tire size is mentioned on the tire information label on
the driver’s doorjamb.
*2: Models with 215/60R17
*3: Models with 225/55R18
Regular
Size
*1
215/60R17 96H
225/55R18 98H
Pressure
psi (kPa[kgf/cm
2
])
Front 33 (230 [2.3])
Rear 32 (220 [2.2])
Compact
Spare
Size T135/90D17 104M
Pressure
psi (kPa[kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
17 x 6 1/2J
*2
18 x 7J
*3
Compact Spare 17 x 4T
* Not available on all models
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 641 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
642
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification NumberEngine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Continuously Variable Transmission
Number
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 642 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
643
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements
and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 643 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
644
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 644 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
645
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some
states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in
(P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 645 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
646
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 646 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
647
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 647 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
648
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■
Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts
The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for
motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty
coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the
vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on
the vehicle.
This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for
commercial or industrial use.
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs
to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the
vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of
the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty.
The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an
aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an
authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise
covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage.
Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or
deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to
consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a
waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 648 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
649
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
■
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
■
EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director,
Light-Duty Vehicle Center,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Attention: Warranty Claim
2000 Traverwood Drive,
Ann Arbor, MI 48105;
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 649 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
650
Information
Authorized Manuals
■
Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■
For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■
For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 650 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
651
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda
Customer Services.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop CHI-5
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]m
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
In Guam:
Triple J Autogroup
157 S. Marine Corps Drive
Tamuning, GU 96913
(671) 648-2277
In Saipan, Commonwealth of the
Northern Mariana Islands:
Joeten Motor Company, Inc.
P.O. Box 500680
Saipan, MP 96950
(670) 234-5562
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 642
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 651 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
652
Information
Open Source License
Meter Open Source License
The software embedded in this product includes open source software. Refer to the
following website for details regarding the open source software.
https://www.nippon-seiki.co.jp/business_ic_meter/
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 652 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
Index
653
Index
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 535
Accessories and Modifications ................ 601
Accessory Power Socket........................... 196
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow .................................... 99, 471
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 570
Engine Oil ............................................... 565
Washer ................................................... 574
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 565
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 188
Clock ...................................................... 134
Front Seats.............................................. 180
Head Restraints....................................... 186
Headlights .............................................. 575
Mirrors.................................................... 178
Rear Seats............................................... 183
Sound............................................. 220, 263
Steering Wheel ....................................... 177
Agile Handling Assist............................... 436
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 203
Changing the Mode................ 203, 204, 205
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 206
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 595
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 205
Synchronization Mode ............................ 208
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 203
Air Pressure ....................................... 583, 641
Airbags ........................................................ 50
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 56
Airbag Care............................................... 69
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 53
Indicator.............................................. 66, 93
Knee Airbags............................................. 58
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 67
Sensors...................................................... 50
Side Airbags .............................................. 61
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 64
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................ 437
AM/FM Radio .................................... 222, 269
Android Auto
TM
................................ 240, 308
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 535
Indicator.................................................... 93
Apple CarPlay ................................... 236, 301
Armrest ..................................................... 188
Audio......................................................... 112
Audio Remote Controls............................ 215
Audio System ............................ 212, 219, 244
Adjusting the Sound........................ 220, 263
Android Auto
TM
............................... 240, 308
Audio/Information Screen ........................ 246
Display Setup................................... 221, 264
Error Messages ........................................ 314
General Information ................................ 316
Home Screen........................................... 251
How to Update........................................ 257
How to Update Wirelessly........................ 261
How to Update with a USB Device........... 262
iPod ................................................ 224, 284
Limitations for Manual
Operation.............................. 265, 371, 391
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 227, 287
Reactivating ............................................ 214
Recommended Devices............................ 317
Remote Controls ..................................... 215
Security Code.......................................... 214
Selecting an Audio Source....................... 265
Start Up .................................................. 245
Status Area ............................................. 256
System Updates....................................... 257
System Updates Settings ......................... 258
Theft Protection ...................................... 214
USB Flash Drives...................................... 317
USB Ports ................................................ 213
Wallpaper Setup...................................... 249
Audio/Information Screen ....................... 246
Authorized Manuals ................................ 650
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 152
Auto High-Beam....................................... 171
Indicator.................................................... 96
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 532
Indicator............................................ 90, 532
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator............................................ 90, 532
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ........ 209
Average Fuel Economy ............................ 110
Average Speed ......................................... 112
AWD Torque Distribution Monitor ......... 117
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 653 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
654
Index
B
Battery....................................................... 592
Charging System Indicator ................. 91, 623
If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 617
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 592
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 594
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 39
Beverage Holders...................................... 193
Blind Spot Information System ................ 445
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 230, 290
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ........... 369, 389
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 82
Brake System............................................. 528
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 535
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 532
Brake Assist System ................................. 536
Fluid ........................................................ 573
Foot Brake ............................................... 531
Indicator (Amber)............................... 90, 626
Indicator (Red) ..................... 88, 89, 624, 626
Parking Brake .......................................... 528
Bulb Replacement..................................... 575
Back-Up Lights......................................... 576
Brake Lights............................................. 576
Front Turn Signal/Parking, Daytime Running
and Front Side Marker Lights ................. 575
Headlights ............................................... 575
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 576
Rear License Plate Light............................ 576
Rear Side Marker Lights ........................... 576
Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................ 576
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 575
Taillights.................................................. 576
Bulb Specifications ................................... 640
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 83
Cargo Floor Box........................................ 195
Carrying Cargo ................................. 411, 413
Certification Label.................................... 642
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 575
Charging System Indicator................. 91, 623
Child Safety................................................. 70
Childproof Door Locks............................. 151
Child Seat.................................................... 70
Booster Seats ............................................ 82
Child Seat for Infants................................. 72
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 73
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 77
Larger Children ......................................... 81
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 72
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 74
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 151
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 598
Cleaning the Interior................................ 596
Climate Control System............................ 203
Changing the Mode ........................ 203, 204
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 206
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 205
Synchronization Mode ............................ 208
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 203
Clock ......................................................... 134
CMBS
TM
(Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
) ................................................ 453
Coat Hook ................................................ 194
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ................................................. 453
Compact Spare Tire.......................... 605, 641
Console Compartment............................. 192
Continuously Variable Transmission....... 426
Creeping................................................. 426
Kickdown ............................................... 426
Operating the Shift ................................. 428
Operating the Shift Lever .......................... 24
Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 619
Shifting................................................... 427
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Fluid ....................................................... 572
Controls .................................................... 133
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 570
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 571
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 570
Overheating............................................ 620
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 426
Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 542
Cup Holders.............................................. 193
Customer Service Information ................ 651
Customize Display.................................... 121
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 654 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
655
Index
Customized Features ............... 123, 337, 345
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 170
Dead Battery ............................................ 617
Defaulting All the Settings.............. 344, 368
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 206
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 643
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 166
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 178
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 566
Display Setup.................................... 221, 264
Door Mirrors............................................. 179
Doors ........................................................ 136
Auto Door Locking.................................. 152
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 152
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator ............. 38
Keys........................................................ 136
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside .............................................. 149
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside ........................................... 139
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 585
Drive Mode Switch................................... 429
Driver Attention Monitor........................ 114
Driver Information Interface................... 107
Switching the Display.............................. 107
Driving....................................................... 409
Braking.................................................... 528
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 426
Shifting Position ...................................... 427
Starting the Engine .................................. 418
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 595
E
Eco Assist® System ...................................... 13
ECON Mode Indicator ................................ 98
Elapsed Time............................................. 112
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 93, 625
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 434
Emergency ................................................ 634
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 645
Engine
Coolant ................................................... 570
If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 617
Number................................................... 642
Oil ........................................................... 565
Starting ................................................... 418
Switch Buzzer.................................. 164, 165
Engine Coolant ......................................... 570
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 571
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 570
Overheating ............................................ 620
Engine Oil ................................................. 565
Adding .................................................... 567
Checking................................................. 566
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 556
Engine oil pressure low Warning ............. 622
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 565
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 163
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide).. 83
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 598
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 179
F
Features .................................................... 211
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 595
Oil........................................................... 568
Flat Tire..................................................... 605
Floor Mats................................................. 597
Fluids
Brake ...................................................... 573
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)..................................................... 572
Engine Coolant ....................................... 570
Windshield Washer ................................. 574
FM/AM Radio.................................... 222, 269
Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 183
Foot Brake ................................................ 531
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 53
Front Seat Heaters.................................... 202
Front Seats
Adjusting ................................................ 180
Front Wide View Camera......................... 525
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 655 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
656
Index
Fuel...................................................... 25, 547
Average Fuel Economy............................. 110
Economy ................................................. 550
Gauge ..................................................... 104
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 110
Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ........................ 92
Range...................................................... 110
Recommendation .................................... 547
Refueling........................................... 25, 547
Fuel Economy............................................ 550
Fuel Fill Cap................................................. 25
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 25, 548
Unable to Unlock..................................... 635
Fuses .......................................................... 628
Inspecting and Changing......................... 632
Locations ......................................... 628, 630
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Average Fuel Economy............................. 110
Economy ................................................. 550
Gauge ..................................................... 104
Information ............................................. 547
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 110
Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ........................ 92
Refueling................................................. 547
Gauges....................................................... 104
Glass (care) ........................................ 597, 599
Glove Box .................................................. 192
H
Handling the Unexpected........................ 603
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 369, 389
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History.................................... 381, 399
Automatic Transferring.................... 379, 398
Favorite Contacts ............................ 382, 400
HFL Buttons..................................... 369, 389
HFL Menus ...................................... 372, 392
HFL Status Display ........................... 371, 391
In Case of Emergency.............................. 406
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 371, 391
Making a Call.................................. 384, 402
Options During a Call ...................... 388, 405
Phone Setup.................................... 374, 394
Receiving a Call ............................... 387, 404
Ringtone ......................................... 379, 398
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 8
HD Radio
TM
................................................ 270
Head Restraints ........................................ 186
Headlights................................................. 166
Aiming .................................................... 575
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 171
Dimming ................................................. 166
Operating................................................ 166
Heated Steering Wheel............................ 201
Heated Windshield................................... 176
Heaters (Front Seat) ................................. 202
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 369, 389
High Beam Indicator .................................. 96
Hill Descent Control System..................... 432
Hill Descent Control System Indicator ...... 98
Hill Start Assist System............................. 423
Honda App License Agreement .............. 318
Honda Sensing® ................................ 26, 449
HondaLink® ............................................ 293
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission......................... 642
Vehicle Identification............................... 642
If the Battery Is Dead............................... 617
Immobilizer System.................................. 156
Indicator ................................................... 97
Important Handling Information.............. 36
Indicators.................................................... 86
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (Amber) ............................. 99
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (White/Green).................... 99
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 93
Auto High-Beam ....................................... 96
Automatic Brake Hold....................... 90, 532
Automatic Brake Hold System ........... 90, 532
Charging System............................... 91, 623
Cruise Mode (White/Green) ...................... 99
ECON Mode ..................................... 98, 429
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 93, 625
Engine oil pressure low Warning ............. 622
High Beam................................................ 96
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 656 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
657
Index
Hill Descent Control System
(White/Green) ......................................... 98
Immobilizer System ................................... 97
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(Amber) ................................................ 100
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(White/Green) ....................................... 100
Lights On .................................................. 96
Low Fuel (Amber)...................................... 92
Low Temperature...................................... 92
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............ 95, 438, 627
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 91, 623
NORMAL Mode ................................ 98, 429
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Amber) .......................................... 90, 626
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Red) ................................. 88, 89, 624, 626
Safety Support (Amber)........................... 101
Safety Support (Green/Gray) ................... 103
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 41, 92
Security System Alarm............................... 97
Shift Position............................................. 91
SNOW Mode ............................................ 98
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 66, 93
System Message ....................................... 98
Transmission System Indicator................... 91
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning............... 96
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF .. 94, 435
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System ............................................ 94, 434
Information .............................................. 639
Instant Fuel Economy ............................... 110
Instrument Panel ........................................ 85
Interior Lights ........................................... 189
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 178
iPod ................................................... 224, 284
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ................ 604, 608
Jump Starting ........................................... 617
K
Keys ........................................................... 136
Number Tag ............................................ 137
Rear Door Won’t Open ............................ 151
Remote Transmitter ................................. 145
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission) .......................................... 426
Knee Airbags .............................................. 58
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 491
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 75
Lights................................................. 166, 575
Auto High-Beam...................................... 171
Bulb Replacement.................................... 575
Daytime Running Lights........................... 170
High Beam Indicator .................................. 96
Interior .................................................... 189
Light Switches ......................................... 166
Lights On Indicator .................................... 96
Parking Lights.......................................... 166
Load Limits................................................ 413
Locking/Unlocking.................................... 136
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 152
Childproof Door Locks............................. 151
From Inside ............................................. 149
From Outside .......................................... 139
Keys........................................................ 136
Using a Key ............................................. 146
Low Battery Charge ................................. 623
Low Fuel Indicator (Amber)....................... 92
Low Speed Braking Control..................... 465
Low Temperature Indicator....................... 92
Lower Anchors............................................ 75
Lubricant Specifications Chart................. 641
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 413
M
Maintenance............................................. 551
Battery .................................................... 592
Brake Fluid .............................................. 573
Cleaning ................................................. 596
Climate Control System........................... 595
Coolant................................................... 570
Maintenance Minder ............................... 555
Oil........................................................... 566
Precautions ............................................. 553
Radiator .................................................. 571
Remote Transmitter................................. 594
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 657 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
658
Index
Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 575
Safety...................................................... 553
Service Items............................................ 559
Tires ........................................................ 581
Transmission Fluid.................................... 572
Under the Hood....................................... 563
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 91, 623
Map Light Switches .................................. 190
Maximum Load Limit................................ 413
Meters, Gauges......................................... 104
Mirrors....................................................... 178
Adjusting................................................. 178
Door........................................................ 179
Exterior.................................................... 179
Interior Rearview...................................... 178
Modifications (and Accessories)............... 601
Moonroof.................................................. 162
MP3.................................................... 227, 287
Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 545
N
Navigation................................................. 113
No Content................................................ 122
NORMAL Mode Indicator........................... 98
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 642
O
Odometer.................................................. 105
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines.............. 416
Oil (Engine)............................................... 565
Adding.................................................... 567
Checking................................................. 566
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 556
Engine oil pressure low Warning ............. 622
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 565
Viscosity .................................................. 565
Open Source Licenses....................... 332, 652
Opening and Closing the Moonroof....... 162
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 564
Moonroof ............................................... 162
Power Windows ...................................... 159
Tailgate ................................................... 153
Outside Temperature Display.................. 105
Overheating.............................................. 620
P
Panic Mode ............................................... 158
Parking...................................................... 537
Parking Brake ........................................... 528
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Amber) ............................................. 90, 626
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Red) .................................... 88, 89, 624, 626
Parking Lights........................................... 166
Parking Sensor System ............................. 538
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 67
Passing Indicators ..................................... 166
Phone ........................................................ 112
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 230, 290
Power Windows ....................................... 159
Precautions While Driving
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle.................................................. 425
Rain ........................................................ 425
Pregnant Women....................................... 48
Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 605
R
Radiator.................................................... 571
Radio (FM/AM) ................................. 222, 269
Radio (SiriusXM®)..................................... 273
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 223, 271
Range........................................................ 110
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 223, 271
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 645
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
System
TM
.................................................. 437
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button..................................................... 176
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 183
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 178
Refueling .......................................... 408, 547
Fuel Gauge ............................................. 104
Gasoline ......................................... 547, 640
Low Fuel Indicator (Amber) ....................... 92
Regulations .............................. 443, 585, 643
Remote Transmitter................................. 145
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 658 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
659
Index
Replacement
Battery.................................................... 594
Bulbs ...................................................... 575
Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 577
Fuses .............................................. 628, 630
Tires........................................................ 588
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 579
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 644
Resetting a Trip Meter............................. 110
Road Departure Mitigation..................... 511
On and Off ............................................. 514
S
Safe Driving................................................ 33
Safety Check............................................... 38
Safety Labels .............................................. 84
Safety Message ............................................ 4
Safety Support ......................................... 118
Seat Belts .................................................... 39
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 46
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 43
Checking .................................................. 49
Detachable Anchor ................................... 47
Fastening .................................................. 44
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt ................................................. 77
Pregnant Women...................................... 48
Reminder .................................................. 41
Warning Indicator ............................... 41, 92
Seat Heaters ............................................. 202
Seats .......................................................... 180
Adjusting................................................. 180
Front Seat Heaters ................................... 202
Front Seats .............................................. 180
Rear Seats ............................................... 183
Security System ......................................... 156
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 97
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 97
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 74
Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 219
Settings ..................................................... 123
Shift
Operation ................................................ 428
Shift Lever ........................................... 24, 427
Operation .................................................. 24
Releasing................................................. 619
Won’t Move ............................................ 619
Shift Position Indicator....................... 91, 428
Shifting (Transmission)............................. 427
Shoulder Anchor......................................... 46
Side Airbags ................................................ 61
Side Curtain Airbags................................... 64
Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 234
SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 273
Smart Shortcuts ........................................ 297
SNOW Mode Indicator ............................... 98
Snow Tires................................................. 590
Spare Tire .......................................... 605, 641
Spark Plugs................................................ 640
Specifications ............................................ 640
Specified Fuel.................................... 547, 640
Speed/Distance Units................................ 122
Speedometer ............................................ 104
SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 53
Starting the Engine.................................. 418
Does Not Start......................................... 612
If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 617
Steering Wheel
Adjusting ................................................ 177
Stopping ................................................... 537
Summer Tires ............................................ 590
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 53
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel)............................................. 8, 9, 163
System Message Indicator.......................... 98
System Updates ........................................ 257
T
Tachometer............................................... 104
Tailgate..................................................... 153
Unable to Open....................................... 636
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display................... 105
Temperature Sensor................................. 105
Tie-down Anchors .................................... 194
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 438
Indicator............................................ 95, 627
Tires........................................................... 581
Air Pressure..................................... 583, 641
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 581
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 659 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
660
Index
Inspection................................................ 582
Labeling................................................... 583
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 605
Regulations.............................................. 585
Rotation .................................................. 589
Spare Tire ........................................ 605, 641
Summer................................................... 590
Tire Chains .............................................. 590
Wear Indicators ....................................... 587
Winter..................................................... 590
Tools .......................................................... 604
Towing a Trailer........................................ 415
Towing Behind a Motorhome ................. 415
Towing Your Vehicle
Emergency............................................... 634
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 438
Indicator............................................ 95, 627
Traffic Jam Assist ...................................... 502
Traffic Sign Recognition System ...... 105, 519
Transmission.............................................. 427
Continuously Variable.............................. 426
Fluid ........................................................ 572
Number................................................... 642
Shift Position Indicator ....................... 91, 428
Trip Computer........................................... 248
Trip Meter ................................................. 110
Troubleshooting ....................................... 603
Blown Fuse...................................... 628, 630
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 30
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 31
Emergency Towing.................................. 634
Engine Won’t Start.................................. 612
Noise When Braking.................................. 31
Overheating ............................................ 620
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 605
Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 30, 151
Shift Lever Won’t Move........................... 619
Warning Indicators .................................... 86
Turn Signals
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 96
U
USB Flash Drives ............... 212, 227, 287, 317
USB Ports................................................... 213
V
Vanity Mirrors............................................. 11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....... 642
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) .............. 434
Off Button............................................... 435
OFF Indicator............................................. 94
System Indicator........................................ 94
Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 565, 641
Voice Control Operation.......................... 266
Audio Commands ................................... 267
General Commands ................................ 267
List Commands ....................................... 268
Navigation Commands ............................ 268
Phone Commands................................... 267
Standard Commands .............................. 268
Voice Portal Screen ................................. 267
Voice Recognition ................................... 266
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
) .............. 434
W
Walk away auto lock® ............................ 142
Wallpaper................................................. 249
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 622
Warning Labels .......................................... 84
Warnings .................................................. 122
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 647
Watts ........................................................ 640
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 587
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)... 604, 608
Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 300
Window Washers ..................................... 174
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 574
Switch .................................................... 174
Windshield ............................................... 174
Cleaning ......................................... 597, 599
Defrosting/Defogging ..................... 176, 206
Washer Fluid........................................... 574
Wiper Blades........................................... 577
Wipers and Washers ............................... 174
Winter Tires
Snow Tires .............................................. 590
Tire Chains.............................................. 590
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 660 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
661
Index
Wipers and Washers ................................ 174
Checking and Replacing Wiper
Blades ........................................... 577, 579
Wireless Charger ...................................... 197
WMA................................................. 227, 287
Worn Tires ........................................ 581, 587
23 HR-V-313V06000_01.book 661 ページ ２０２２年４月４日 月曜日 午前１０時４９分
© 2022 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved
Printed in the U.S.A.
owners.honda.com (U.S.)
honda.ca (Canada)
313V0600
OM-18618
00X31-3V0-6000
2023 Honda HR-V Owner’s Manual
